FM 21-100 
WAR DEPARTMENT 
BASIC FIELD MANUAL 
SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK FM 21-100 
BASIC FIELD MANUAL 
SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
Prepared under direction of the 
Chief of Staff 
UNITED STATES 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
WASHINGTON: 1941 
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. - Price 35 cents WAR DEPARTMENT, 
FM 21-100, Soldier’s Handbook, is published for the infor- 
mation and guidance of all concerned. Its purpose is to give 
the newly enrolled member of the United States Army a con- 
venient and compact source of basic military information and 
thus to aid him to perform his duties more efficiently. 
Washington, December 11, 1940. 
[A. G. 062.11 (10-21-40).] 
order of the Secretary of War: 
G. C. MARSHALL, 
Official : 
Chief of Staff. 
E. S. ADAMS, 
Major General, 
The Adjutant General. 
n FOREWORD 
You are now a member of the Army of the United States. 
That Army is made up of free citizens chosen from among a 
free people. The American people of their own will, and 
through the men they have elected to represent them in Con- 
gress, have determined that the free institutions of this coun- 
try will continue to exist. They have declared that, if 
necessary, we will defend our right to live in our own American 
way and continue to enjoy the benefits and privileges which 
are granted to the citizens of no other nation. It is upon you, 
and the many thousands of your comrades now in the mili- 
tary service, that our country has placed its confident faith 
that this defense will succeed should it ever be challenged. 
In the transition from civil life to the life of a soldier you 
may, at first, feel somewhat confused. It is the purpose of 
this handbook to help you over these rough spots as rapidly 
as possible and to lay the foundations for your successful 
career as a soldier. 
Making good as a soldier is no different from making good 
in civil life. The rule is the same and that is—know your 
own job and be ready to step into the job of the man ahead 
of you. Promotion is going to be very rapid in this Army. 
Be ready for it. You will have little time to learn the duties 
of a noncommissioned officer after you become one. You 
will be expected to know those duties and show that you 
know them. At a moment’s notice you may have to take 
charge of your squad as a corporal—and in a critical hour. 
In the same way when you are a sergeant you cannot tell 
under what conditions and at what hour you may have to 
take the place of your lieutenant. You want to know what 
is expected of you and be ready to do it. 
The things that a trained soldier must know, and the way 
in which they are done, will be taught you as rapidly as you 
can absorb them. The basic military information is de- 
scribed and explained in this handbook so that it may be 
available constantly to you during the first weeks of your 
service. By mastering the contents your future progress 
will be much more rapid. 
Ill In making yourself an efficient soldier you are helping to 
build a defense for our country that nothing can destroy. 
You are repaying your obligation to the United States for 
all the benefits of the past and are declaring your faith in 
our future. If you will make a part of yourself the following 
characteristics of the good soldier, you will be doing your 
part in upholding the glorious reputation of the Army of the 
United States: 
Be obedient.—Obedience means to obey promptly and cheer- 
fully all orders of your commissioned and noncommissioned 
officers. At first you cannot be expected to know the reason 
for everything you are ordered to do. As you remain longer 
in the service and you understand more of the reasons for mil- 
itary training you will find that everything has been figured 
out as the result of experience in the past. Ways and methods 
which have been successful in the past are continued until 
some new way proves to be better, and then the change will be 
made. Cheerful obedience leads to a better performance of 
your duties. It makes it easier for all of your comrades to do 
their part. It means better teamwork. 
Be loyal.—Loyalty means that you must stand by your or- 
ganization through thick and thin. Boost your organization 
at every opportunity. Be loyal and true to your officers, your 
noncommissioned officers, and your comrades. In this way you 
will be loyal to your country. 
Be determined.—Determination means the bulldog stick-to- 
it-iveness to win at all costs. During your training keep ever- 
lastingly at the most difficult tasks and never give up until you 
have mastered them. Determination to win means success in 
battle. 
Be alert.—Alertness means being always on your guard. A 
good soldier may be pardoned for failure, but never for being 
surprised. Should the unexpected happen, use your head and 
do something, even if it is wrong, rather than “lie down.” 
Be a member of the team.—Teamwork means that each man 
in the squad, platoon, company, troop, or battery gives every- 
thing in his power to make for the success of the whole unit. 
Success in battle depends on teamwork just as much as suc- 
cess in a football game depends on the pull-together spirit of 
the football team. Unless you play your own special part the 
team may not win. 
IV RECORD OP THE SOLDIER 
Name 
Army serial No. 
Grade Organization 
Height Weight 
Born 
(Place) (Date) 
In case of emergency notify 
(Name) 
(Address) (Town) (State) 
Beneficiary (6 months’ pay) 
(Name) 
(Relation) (Street and number (Town and state) 
or rural route) 
Government insurance 
(Amount) (Policy number) 
Other insurance 
(Amount) (Policy number) 
Bank account 
(Name of bank) (City and state) 
Rifle number 
Pistol number 
Company number 
Watch 
Regimental commander’s name 
Battalion commander’s name 
Company commander’s name 
Platoon commander’s name 
Squad leader’s name 
Y TABLE OF CONTENTS 
Paragraphs Page 
Foreword m 
Chapter 1. General Information. 
Section I. Responsibilities of group life 1-3 1 
11. Relationship with noncommissioned 
officers and officers 4-11 2 
111. Relations with civilians 12-14 4 
IV. Military obligations 15-16 5 
V. The Articles of War 17-19 6 
VI. Post and, station activities 20-25 6 
Chapter 2. Military Discipline and Courtesy. 
Section I. Military discipline 26-29 9 
11. Military courtesy 30-33 10 
Chapter 3. Insignia. 
Section I. Arms and services 34r-40 16 
11. Officers! and noncommissioned offi- 
cers 41-44 20 
Chapter 4. Organization 45-53 22 
Chapter 5. Clothing. 
Section I. Allowances 54-55 26 
11. Care of clothing 56-58 26 
111. Wearing the uniform 59 28 
Chapter 6. Arms and Equipment. 
Section I. Responsibility for care 60-62 30 
11. Nomenclature and care and clean- 
ing of U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml_ 63 31 
111. Nomenclature, care and cleaning, 
and safety devices of automatic 
pistol, caliber .45, Ml9ll 64 41 
TV. Safety precautions 65 44 
V. The gas mask 66-72 45 
VI. Field equipment 73-80 50 
VII. The infantry pack 81-82 69 
VIII. Packing individual equipment on 
horse 83-84 73 
IX. Display of equipment 85 79 
Chapter 7. School of the Soldier Without 
Arms (Dismounted) . 
Section I. Positions 86-90 81 
11. Steps and marchings 91-102 84 
Chapter 8. School op the Soldier with Arms 
(Dismounted) . 
Section I. General 103 90 
11. Manual of arms for the rifle 104-127 92 
111. Loadings and firings 128-133 105 
IV. Carrying the automatic rifle 134 111 
V. Manual of the pistol 135-151 113 
Chapter 9. Squad and Platoon Drill. 
Section I. The squad 152-168 118 
11. The platoon 169-184 129 
Chapter 10. Interior Guard Duty 185-193 137 
VII Paragraphs Page 
Chapter 11. Marches, Camps, and Bivouacs. 
Section I. Marches 194—198 140 
11. Camps and bivouacs 199-202 147 
Chapter 12. Use of Compasses and Maps. 
Section I. Use of the Compass 203-207 154 
11. Use of maps 208-216 156 
Chapter 13. Security and Protection. 
Section I. General 217-220 167 
11. Security of individuals 221-228 168 
111. Security of small units 229-236 183 
Chapter 14. Military Sanitation and First Aid. 
Section I. Military sanitation 237-252 206 
11. First aid 253-275 210 
Chapter 15. The Ration 276-282 232 
Chapter 16. Pay and Allowances 283-294 236 
Chapter 17. Last Will and Testament 295 239 
Appendix. Glossary op Common Military Expres- 
sions 240 
Index 243 
VIII BASIC FIELD MANUAL 
SOLDIERS’ HANDBOOK 
CHAPTER I 
GENERAL INFORMATION 
Paragraphs 
Section I. Responsibilities of group life 1-3 
11. Relationship with noncommissioned officers and 
officers 4-11 
111. Relations with civilians 12-14 
IV. Military obligations 15-16 
V. The Articles of War 17-19 
VI. Post and station activities 20-25 
Section I 
RESPONSIBILITIES OP GROUP LIFE 
■ 1. Before you joined the Army you were a member of a 
family of closely related individuals who had many things 
in common. The members of your family shared the same 
dining room, the same bathroom, and the same amusements 
around the house. All worked together, played together, read 
the same newspaper, and were largely dependent upon each 
other for comforts, pleasures, and a living. 
■ 2. You learned that to get along well with other members 
of your family you must have consideration for them, do 
your part of the work, and share things with the rest of the 
household. That was your golden rule and the primary law 
of family relationship and citizenship. 
■ 3. You have the same obligations in the Army but instead 
of the small family group you are one of a much larger group. 
Several hundred may have to live together in one small area. 
Large numbers eat in the same mess hall, use the same bath- 
house or latrine, bunk together, work together, and play 
together. Your bedding, your uniforms, your equipment, and 
your personal possessions will frequently be exposed where 
they can be removed without your knowledge. Living under 
these conditions you must do your part in respecting the 
1 3-7 
soldier’s handbook 
rights and property of others. A soldier who has learned 
to respect the rights of his comrades has made a big step for- 
ward in his training as a soldier and as a citizen. 
Section II 
RELATIONSHIP WITH NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS 
AND OFFICERS 
■ 4. For every business, every game, every group activity, 
and in every walk of life there is a leader, a “boss”, an execu- 
tive, or some directing agency. In the Army these group 
leaders are the officers and the noncommissioned officers. 
■ 5. The President of the United States is the Commander 
in Chief of the Army. He appoints officers, with the con- 
sent of the Senate, to assist him in the details of running the 
Army. He gives them certain authority and makes them 
responsible for certain groups or organizations in accordance 
with their grade and length of service. 
■ 6. You have a commander in charge of your company, bat- 
tery, or troop, who is responsible for everything your company 
does or fails to do. He must see that you are properly trained, 
and that you are fed, clothed, and sheltered. He must look 
after your health, your comfort, and your amusements. He 
could not possibly attend to all these details alone. Suppose 
that your company commander had to go to every individual 
soldier, give him special instructions, explain what to do and 
what not to do, draw rations, issue equipment, keep all your 
records, and do all of the many things which you require. You 
can see that many things would be neglected and that you 
would suffer for lack of proper training, food, equipment, and 
amusements. To assist him in all the details of running the 
company he asks the regimental commander to appoint non- 
commissioned officers who are given certain authority and are 
made responsible for certain things. You are thus a part of a 
great organization or business in which the officers and the 
noncommissioned officers are the executives, the “bosses”, and 
the foremen. 
■ 7. The first thing to appreciate is that you are subject to 
the orders of officers and noncommissioned officers placed over 
2 soldier’s handbook 
7-11 
you. The officers and noncommissioned officers are entitled 
to he, and they must be obeyed and respected by all soldiers 
under them. Make it a rule that you will obey them promptly, 
cheerfully, and carefully. A military order is usually sharp, 
positive, and brief. If you do not understand what is wanted, 
it is your duty to ask questions, but do not quibble over small 
details as to your “rights.” The man who is always thinking 
of his “rights”, rather than his duty, makes a poor soldier. 
■ 8. If you believe that you have been given an unlawful order 
you should obey first and make a report to your commanding 
officer afterwards. Disobedience or failure to obey a lawful 
order, which you may believe to be unlawful, may lead to 
severe consequences. 
O 9. The Articles of War, the soldier’s law, authorize your 
commanding officer to impose certain punishments for minor 
offenses. That is, he can withhold certain privileges, restrict 
you to the area of barracks or camp for a week, or require you 
to perform extra duty or hard labor for as much as a week. 
However, he does not delegate this authority to his noncom- 
missioned officers. A noncommissioned officer is not author- 
ized to administer any form of punishment to a member of his 
command. A noncommissioned officer may require you to 
sweep the barracks floor, wash the squad-room windows, and 
the like but he does this by regular detail from all the members 
of your company, not as a punishment. 
B 10. It is the duty of a noncommissioned officer at all 
times and under all circumstances, whether on duty or off 
duty, to check promptly all disputes, quarrels, or disorderly 
conduct which might bring discredit upon the service. He 
is required to enforce the orders and regulations governing 
the conduct of soldiers. In the absence of an officer, a non- 
commissioned officer may place a soldier under arrest until 
he can be seen by his company commander. 
B 11. It can be seen that officers and noncommissioned of- 
ficers must be specially selected. They hold positions of 
responsibility and honor, but they belong to the same mili- 
tary organization that you do. The relationship between 
all military men is one of comradeship, friendliness, and 
3 11-14 
soldier’s handbook 
helpfulness. In no walk of life does “comradeship” mean 
so much as in the military service and nowhere are obedi- 
ence and respect for authority so important as in the Army. 
As a soldier you must accept constituted authority, which is 
nothing more than team play. In your relationship with 
officers and noncommissioned officers you are expected to be 
loyal and truthful. Always be frank but courteous. By 
being courteous and respectful to constituted authority you 
are exhibiting qualities of a good soldier. 
Section 111 
■ 12. In his off-duty activities, whether in peace or war, the 
good soldier is always careful to be courteous and consid- 
erate toward civilians. You must realize that your organi- 
zation and the Army will be judged by the conduct and 
appearance of its members in public. Any misconduct on 
your part in a public place will bring discredit not only 
upon yourself but also on the military service. You must 
take pains on every occasion to win the respect and con- 
fidence of all with whom you come in contact. 
RELATIONS WITH CIVILIANS 
■ 13. When on duty your relations with civilians are gov- 
erned primarily by the orders and instructions of your 
commanding officer. Here also, whether in peace or war, 
you should treat civilians with all courtesy and consideration 
consistent with a strict observance of your orders and the 
accomplishment of your military mission. 
■ 14. The American Red Cross acts as the medium of com- 
munication between the Army and the civil community. 
This organization has chapters or representatives in all 
parts of the United States and its foreign possessions. If 
you should be concerned about the welfare of your family 
or conditions in your home, explain the situation to your 
company commander. He will help you in obtaining the 
assistance of the Red Cross through the Red Cross field 
director at your station or serving your unit. 
4 soldier’s handbook 
15-16 
Section IV 
MILITARY OBLIGATIONS 
■ 15. a. Every man who enters the Army of the United 
States, whether through voluntary enlistment or operation 
of the Selective Service Law, accepts certain solemn obliga- 
tions. These obligations require that he bear true faith 
and allegiance to the United States of America; that he 
serve them faithfully against all their enemies; and that he 
will obey the orders of the President of the United States 
and the officers appointed over him (the soldier) according 
to the rules and Articles of War. 
Your legal status has changed from that of a civilian to that 
of a soldier. You have become subject to military law and can- 
not again become a civilian until you receive your discharge by 
proper authority. As a civilian you could quit your job and 
seek other employment at will. As a soldier you have given up 
that privilege during the period of your service. During your 
off-duty hours as a civilian you could go when and where you 
pleased without asking permission from anyone. As a soldier 
you must first get permission before leaving your proper 
station. 
b. The reasons for these differences in your status as a civil- 
ian and as a soldier are important but easy to understand. 
The military organization to which you now belong is a team 
that must be constantly trained and ready for duty in any 
emergency. If its members could go and come whenever they 
cared to there would be no assurance that this military team 
would be on hand when needed. 
H 16. As a soldier, then, you must keep in mind and faithfully 
fulfill your obligations. If you do so you will find the service 
pleasant and profitable, and will leave it as a veteran with a 
clean record which will entitle you to the benefits accorded by 
law to an honorably discharged ex-serviceman. Soldiers who 
constantly fail to fulfill these obligations are likely, sooner or 
later, to get into trouble, to lose the respect and regard of their 
comrades, to suffer punishments, and perhaps, finally to return 
to civil life dishonored and disqualified for any of the benefits 
with which the Government rewards honorable and faithful 
service. 
5 17-20 
soldier's handbook 
Section V 
THE ARTICLES OP WAR 
■ 17. The Articles of War are part of the military laws en- 
acted by Congress to control the conduct of those in military 
service of the United States. They govern the administration 
of military justice. They define the offenses for which soldiers 
may be tried by court martial, prescribe the composition and 
procedure of courts martial, and fix the limits of punishment 
that may be imposed by these courts. 
9 18. The Articles of War are read to every soldier shortly 
after he enters the service and at regular intervals thereafter, 
so that no one will be able to excuse himself for a violation of 
any of them upon the ground of ignorance of their provisions. 
■ 19. However, as a good soldier, resolved to observe fully and 
In good faith the obligations of the oath of enlistment above 
discussed, you do not need to spend much time studying the 
detailed provisions of the Articles of War. As a general rule, 
they prohibit and penalize only such conduct as the person of 
ordinary intelligence will readily recognize to be wrong. The 
man who is resolved to do the right thing and carries out that 
resolution at all times, is very unlikely to violate any of the 
Articles of War. Should doubt ever arise in your mind as to 
whether anything you plan to do is improper or a violation of 
the Articles of War, don’t hesitate to take the question to some 
more experienced comrade, to your first sergeant, or to your 
immediate commanding officer. They will be glad to advise 
you. 
Section VT 
■ 20. Although you have exchanged your civilian community 
for a military community, you will find many of the same 
activities on your post or station that you have known in 
civil life. For example, your own organization will probably 
have a barber and a tailor. All soldiers are required to have 
a short haircut known as a “military” haircut. This is done 
for sanitary reasons and to secure uniformity. Your organi- 
zation barber is approved by your organization commander. 
POST AND STATION ACTIVITIES 
6 SOLDIER'S handbook 
20-23 
and is required to maintain a sanitary establishment, which 
is inspected regularly by the post surgeon. Your organization 
tailor is prepared to clean and press your uniform and make 
necessary alterations and repairs. Both of these activities 
are maintained for the service and convenience of the mem- 
bers of your organization. The prices are fixed by the post 
commander so that they will be well within your means. You 
will be given credit by these activities and can pay for what- 
ever service you have received at the end of each month. 
■ 21. The post exchange is the community store, owned jointly 
by you and all other men on your post. It is operated under 
the supervision of the commanding officer and the post ex- 
change officer entirely in your interests. All profits made in 
this store come back to you and your comrades in the form 
of recreational activities, the furnishing of your organiza- 
tion day room, and other similar benefits. No individual 
shares in these profits, and under Army Regulations, profits 
may be expended only for the welfare of the soldiers as a 
whole. The post exchange will probably operate a general 
store, a shoe repair shop, a barber shop, and a tailor shop. 
Your organization orderly room will issue you, on credit, a 
certain amount of post exchange coupons each month, which 
will be accepted by all post exchange activities. The cost of 
these coupons will be collected at the pay table at the end of 
the month. 
■ 22. There will also be a motion picture theatre on your post 
operated by the United States Army Motion Picture Service, 
at which will be shown one or two shows each night, or as 
announced from time to time. There will also be occasional 
free shows. The price of attendance for the regular shows 
is small, and payment may be made in cash, post exchange 
coupons, or in theatre coupons. Theatre coupon books may 
be obtained on credit and paid for at the end of the month 
in the same manner as post exchange coupon books. 
■ 23. A photograph shop will also probably be operated by 
your post exchange. The photographer will make a specialty 
of taking photographs of soldiers at a very small cost, for 
which he will accept either cash or post exchange coupons. 
At your early convenience, have your photograph taken in your 
7 23-25 
soldier’s handbook 
uniform, and send it home to a member of your family. They 
will be glad to have it and so will you, after you have returned 
to civil life. 
B 24. There are also a number of other recreational activities 
on your post in which you are encouraged to participate dur- 
ing your off-duty hours. These will probably include bowling 
alleys, shooting galleries, baseball fields, and basketball and 
volley ball courts. They are provided for your enjoyment, and 
you should take advantage of them at every opportunity. Your 
first sergeant will be glad to explain how you can use them 
and where to obtain the necessary equipment. 
B 25. Your organization has a bulletin board just outside of 
the orderly room or organization headquarters tent. Make it 
a practice to read the contents of the bulletin board several 
times each day. On it will be posted various company and 
guard details as well as announcements as to the uniform and 
equipment to be worn on different occasions, the time and 
place where you will receive your pay, motion picture pro- 
grams, and other items of interest to you. 
8 CHAPTER 2 
MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY 
Paragraphs 
Section I. Military discipline 26-29 
11. Military courtesy , 30-33 
Section I 
■ 26. The average civilian or recruit coming into the Army, 
often misunderstands the meaning of the words military dis- 
cipline. He thinks of them as being connected with punish- 
ments or reprimands which may result from the violation of 
some military law or regulation. Actually, discipline should 
not be something new to you for you have been disciplined all 
of your life. You were being disciplined at home and in school 
when you were taught obedience to your parents and teachers, 
and respect for the rights of others. On your baseball or 
other athletic team you were disciplining yourself when you 
turned down the chance to be a star performer in order that 
the team might win; you were acquiring discipline in the 
shop, or other business, when your loyalty to your employer 
and your fellow employees was greater than your desire to 
secure your own advancement. All of this was merely the 
spirit of team play; that is, you were putting the interests of 
the “team” above your own in order that the “team” might 
win. 
MILITARY DISCIPLINE 
■ 27. The word “company,” “troop,” or “battery” is merely the 
military name for a team, and military discipline is nothing 
more than this same spirit of team play. It is the most im- 
portant thing in the Army. In civil life lack of discipline in 
a young man may result in his getting into trouble which will 
cause his parents and teachers regret or sorrow; it may cause 
a member of an athletic team to be “sent to the bench,” or 
cause an employee to lose his job. In the Army it is far more 
serious. Here lack of discipline in a soldier may not only cost 
him his life and the life of his comrades, but cause a military 
9 27-30 
SOLDIER'S handbook 
undertaking to fail and his team to be defeated. On the other 
hand a team of a few well-disciplined soldiers is worth many 
times a much larger number of undisciplined individuals who 
are nothing more than an armed mob. History repeatedly 
shows that without discipline no body of troops can hold its 
own against a well-directed and well-disciplined enemy. 
■ 28. In your work in the Army you may wonder why the 
officers and noncommissioned officers insist on perfection in 
what appears to be minor details. Why do rifles have to be 
carried at just the same angle; why do you have to keep ac- 
curately in line; why must your bed be made in a certain 
way; why must your uniform and equipment be in a pre- 
scribed order at all times; why must all officers be saluted 
with snap and precision? These things are part of your dis- 
ciplinary training. Their purpose is to teach you obedience, 
loyalty, team play, personal pride, pride in your organiza- 
tion, respect for the rights of others, love of the flag, and the 
will to win. 
■ 29. So you see that being disciplined does not mean you 
are being punished. It means that you are learning to place 
the task of your unit—your team—above your personal wel- 
fare; that you are learning to obey promptly and cheerfully 
the orders of your officers and noncommissioned officers so 
that even when they are not present you will carry out their 
orders to the very best of your ability. When you have learned 
these things and prompt and cheerful obedience has become 
second nature to you, then you have acquired military dis- 
cipline—the kind of discipline which will save lives and win 
battles. 
Section II 
MILITARY COURTESY 
■ 30. In your home and school you were taught to be polite 
and considerate in your speech and attitude to your parents, 
your teachers, and your comrades. That was courtesy. Mil- 
itary courtesy is the same thing except that the military man 
is so proud of his profession and has such high respect for the 
men who belong to it that in the Army courtesy is more care- 
10 soldier’s handbook 
30 
fully observed than in civil life. Military courtesy is a part 
of military discipline. The disciplined soldier is always cour- 
teous whether on duty or off, whether to members of the 
military service or to civilians. To help you in quickly be- 
coming a well disciplined and efficient member of your team, 
the following are some of the more common occasions on 
which you may have an opportunity to demonstrate your 
military courtesy. The rules are few and simple, but they 
have an important bearing on your career as a soldier. 
a. The military salute is the courteous recognition between 
members of the armed forces of our country. The salute is 
a privilege enjoyed only by members of the military service in 
good standing; prisoners do not have the right to salute. 
b. The salute is given when you meet a person entitled to 
it. Those entitled to it are all officers of our Army, Navy, 
Marine Corps, and Coast Guard. It is also customary to 
salute officers of friendly foreign countries when they are 
in uniform. 
c. The salute should be given when you can easily recog- 
nize that the person is an officer and entitled to it. Usually 
this is at a distance of not more than 30 and not less than 
6 paces, in order that the officer may have time to recog- 
nize and return it. 
d. When you execute the salute turn your head so that 
you observe the officer and look him straight in the eye. 
The smartness with which you give it indicates the pride 
you have in your profession. A careless or half-hearted 
salute is discourteous. (See fig. 31.) 
e. In posts, camps, or stations, the salute is always given 
whenever you recognize an officer, even though one or both 
of you are in civilian clothes. It is likewise given whether 
or not you are wearing a head covering. For rule when out- 
side post, camp or station see paragraph 31 j. 
/. If the officer remains in your immediate vicinity with- 
out talking to you, no further salute is necessary when he 
departs. If a conversation takes place however, you should 
again salute when either you or he leaves. 
fir. (1) If you are one of a group of soldiers, not in forma- 
tion, call the group to attention as soon as you recognize an 
officer approaching, unless some, other member of the group 
11 30 
SOLDIER’S handbook 
has already done so. If the group is out of doors, all mem- 
bers of the group salute; if indoors or in a tent, all remove 
their head covering and stand at attention unless otherwise 
directed. 
(2) If the group is in formation out of doors, it is called 
to attention by the one in charge and he alone gives the 
salute, 
(3) If you meet an officer on a staircase or in a hallway, 
halt and stand at attention. 
h. The salute is given only at a halt, or a walk. Either 
mounted or dismounted, always bring your gait down to a 
walk before saluting. Except in the field under campaign 
conditions, always dismount before speaking to or replying 
to a dismounted officer. 
i. If you report to an officer in his office, first remove your 
headdress, unless you are carrying your rifle or side arms, 
and enter when told to do so. March up to within two paces 
of the officer’s desk, halt, salute, and state, “Sir, Pri- 
vate reports to .” (For example, “Sir, Private 
Jones reports to the Company Commander.”) After re- 
porting, carry on the conversation in the first and second 
person. When the conversation is ended, salute, make an 
about face, and withdraw. Unless you are carrying your 
rifle or side arms, always remove your headdress when en- 
tering a room where an officer is present. 
j. If you are driving a motor vehicle, salute only when 
the vehicle is halted. If it is an animal-drawn vehicle, 
salute only when both hands are not required to control 
your team. Any other soldier in the vehicle salutes whether 
the vehicle is at a halt or in motion, unless there are a 
number of soldiers in the vehicle in charge of an officer or 
noncommissioned officer. In this case only the officer or 
noncommissioned officer gives the salute. 
k. When you are dismounted and not in formation and the 
National Anthem is played, or “To the Colors,” sounded, at the 
first note face the music, stand at attention and give the salute. 
At “Escort of the Color” or “Retreat,” face toward the color 
or flag. If you are in civilian clothes and wearing a headdress, 
stand at attention, remove your headdress and hold it over 
your left breast. If you are in civilian clothes and not wearing 
12 soldier’s handbook 
30 
a headdress, stand at attention and execute the hand salute. 
Hold the salute until the last note of the music. If you are 
mounted and not in formation, halt and give the salute while 
mounted. Vehicles in motion will be brought to a halt. If 
you are riding in a passenger vehicle or on a motorcycle, dis- 
mount and salute. In other types of military vehicles, as for 
example troop carriers, trucks, and escort wagons, all indi- 
viduals except the person in charge of the vehicle remain 
seated or standing (depending on whether they are riding 
seated or standing) in the vehicle at attention. The person 
in charge of the vehicle, unless he be a tank commander or 
the driver of a horse-drawn vehicle, dismounts and renders 
the salute. Tank commanders salute from their vehicles. 
Drivers of horse-drawn vehicles remain in their vehicles and 
salute only if both hands are not required to control their 
teams. Individuals leading animals or standing to horse 
stand at attention but do not salute. The same respect is 
shown the national anthem of any other country when it is 
played on special occasions. 
Z. If you are passing, or being passed, by an uncased na- 
tional color render the same honors as when the National 
Anthem is played. 
m. Whenever you are present but not in formation while 
personal honors are being rendered, salute and remain in that 
position until the completion of the ruffles, flourishes, and 
march. 
n. (1) In garrison, if posted as a sentinel with a rifle, you 
will salute by presenting arms. During the hours when chal- 
lenging is prescribed, the first salute to an officer is given as 
soon as he has been recognized and advanced. 
(2) While posted as a sentinel, if you are talking to an offi- 
cer, do not interrupt your conversation to salute another officer. 
However, if the officer to whom you are talking salutes his 
senior, you will also salute. 
o. If you are attending a military funeral not as a member 
of a formation, and whether in uniform or civilian clothes, 
stand at attention, remove your headdress, and hold it over 
your left breast at any time the casket is being moved by the 
casket bearers and during the services at the grave, including 
the firing of volleys and the sounding of taps. During the 
13 30-32 
soldier’s handbook 
prayers, bow your head. If the weather is cold or inclement, 
keep your headdress on and give the hand salute whenever the 
casket is being moved by the casket bearers, and during the 
firing of volleys and sounding of taps. 
■ 31. The following situations will assist you in remembering 
when you do not or need not salute: 
a. If you are in ranks and not at attention and an officer 
speaks to you, come to attention, but do not salute. The officer 
or noncommissioned officer in command of your unit will give 
the salute for the entire organization to the person entitled 
to it. 
b. If an officer enters the mess room or mess tent, you re- 
main seated, “at ease,” and continue eating unless the officer 
directs otherwise. If the officer speaks directly to you, remain 
seated “at attention” until the conversation is ended, unless 
he directs otherwise. 
c. Members of details at work do not salute. The officer 
or noncommissioned officer in charge will salute for the entire 
detail. 
d. When actually taking part in games you do not salute. 
e. When standing to horse or leading a horse do not salute. 
/. In churches, theaters, or other places of public assem- 
blage, or in a public conveyance, do not salute. Indoors, 
salutes are not given except when reporting to an officer. 
g. Do not salute when carrying articles with both hands 
or when you are otherwise so occupied as to make saluting 
impracticable. 
h. If you are posted as a mounted or dismounted sentinel 
and are armed with a pistol, do not salute after challenging. 
Stand at “Raise Pistol” until the officer you have challenged 
has passed. 
i. When on a march in campaign, or under simulated cam- 
paign conditions, do not salute. 
j. Off duty, and when you are not in a post, camp, or sta- 
tion, the salute is optional unless you are addressed by an 
officer. 
■ 32. While officers and noncommissioned officers will usually 
address you by your last name, always use their title in 
addressing them. The following titles are used in the mili- 
tary service; 
14 soldier’s handbook 
32-33 
a. All general officers are addressed as “General”; lieu- 
tenant colonels are addressed as “Colonel”; and both first 
and second lieutenants as “Lieutenant.” 
b. All chaplains, regardless of grade, are addressed as 
“Chaplain.” Catholic chaplains may be addressed as 
“Father.” 
c. Warrant officers are addressed as “Mister.” 
d. Members of the Army Nurse Corps are addressed as 
“Nurse.” 
e. Noncommissioned officers are addressed as “Sergeant” or 
“Corporal.” Master sergeants, technical sergeants, and staff 
sergeants are all addressed as “Sergeant.” 
■ 33. As the result of the observance of military courtesy in 
our Army for many years, certain customs have come into 
existence which are recognized as our unwritten law of con- 
duct. Every civilian community, school, or business has its 
own customs, and a newcomer should learn them as quickly 
as possible so that he will not be embarrassed. In the same 
way, you will discover that your own organization probably 
has its own local customs, many of which date from some 
event in the organization’s history, and of which it is very 
proud. You should become familiar with these customs as 
early as possible. The following are a few of the general 
customs which are observed throughout our Army, and which 
you should know: 
a. If you wish to speak to your company, battery, or troop 
commander, first obtain permission from your first sergeant. 
The company commander will always see you, but he may be 
busy at the time or the first sergeant may be able to answer 
your question. 
b. If you wish to deposit some of your money on pay day, 
notify your first sergeant before reporting to receive your pay. 
c. When you report to your company commander for pay, 
halt directly in front of him and salute. After receiving 
your pay count it quickly, execute a right or left face and 
depart. 
d. Do not salute with one hand in your pocket, while 
smoking, or with your coat unbuttoned or partly unbuttoned. 
e. If you should be accompanying a dismounted officer 
walk on his left; if both you and the officer are mounted ride 
on his left. 
15 CHAPTER 3 
Paragraphs 
Section I. Arms and services 34-40 
11. Officers and noncommissioned officers 41-44 
INSIGNIA 
Section I 
ARMS AND SERVICES 
■ 34. Insignia.—Each cf the various arms and services in 
our Army has a particular “mark” of its own which is worn 
by all of its members. It serves to distinguish those members 
from all other soldiers of the Army and is a part of the uni- 
form. These various marks are called insignia and usually 
consist of two types: the metal insignia which you will wear 
on the collar of your shirt or the lapel of your coat, and the 
colored hat cord which you will wear on your service hat. 
■ 35. To assist you in becoming quickly familiar with the 
various types of insignia and so that you can tell at a glance 
to which arm or service a soldier may belong, they are shown 
in figure 1. 
■ 36. Hat Cord.—At a distance it will be easier to recognize 
the arm or service to which a soldier belongs by the color of 
his hat cord. You should be familiar with the following 
colors and the arm or service which they identify. Where 
two colors are given, the cord is of the first color and the 
acorns and keeper are the color of the piping. 
a. Air Corps—Ultramarine blue piped with golden orange. 
b. Cavalry—Yellow. 
c. Chemical Warfare Service—Cobalt blue piped with 
golden orange. 
d. Coast Artillery Corps—Scarlet. 
e. Corps of Engineers—Scarlet piped with white. 
f. Field Artillery—Scarlet. 
g. Finance Department—Silver-grey piped with golden, 
yellow. 
h. Infantry and tanks—Blue. 
i. Medical Department—Maroon piped with white. 
16 soldier's handbook 
REGULAR ARMY & ORGANIZED RESERVE 
NATIONAL GUARD 
(Not- assigned 
to regiment-) 
(v/ito regimental 
number) 
(/Nof assigned 
■to regiment-} 
(Wito regimental 
nurnbcr} 
Arm or 
Serviced 
, Distinctive / 
V-lnsignig/ 
AIR CORPS 
CAVALRY 
CHEM. WARFARE 
SERVICE 
COAST ART. 
CORPS 
CORPS OF 
ENGINEERS 
FIELD 
ARTILLERY 
FINANCE 
DEPARTMENT 
IN FAN TRY 
MEDICAL 
DEPARTMENT 
NAT. GUARD 
BUREAU 
ORDNANCE 
DEPARTMENT 
QUARTERMASTER 
CORPS 
SIGNAL 
CORPS 
DETACHED 
ENLISTED MEN 
Figure I.—Collar insignia for enlisted men. 
17 36-40 
SOLDIER’S handbook 
j. Military police—Yellow piped with green. 
k. Ordnance Department—Crimson piped with yellow. 
l. Quartermaster Corps—Buff. 
m. Signal Corps—Orange piped with white. 
■ 37. Arm Band.—ln addition to the identification marks de- 
scribed above, sometimes you will see certain soldiers wearing 
arm bands to show the particular type of work they are doing. 
These arm bands are called “brassards” and are worn on the 
left sleeve above the elbow. You will want to know the fol- 
lowing brassards and what they mean— 
a. Blue, with the letters “MP” in white—Military Police. 
b. Red, with the word “Fire” in white—Members of fire 
departments. 
c. White, with red cross in center—Geneva Convention Red 
Cross. 
d. White with green cross in center—Veterinary Green 
Cross. 
■ 38. Service Stripe.—Each enlisted man who has served 
honorably in the military service for three years wears the 
service stripe. This stripe is worn 4 inches from the end of 
the left sleeve of the service coat. For each additional period 
of 3 years, another service stripe is worn. 
■ 39. Wound and war service chevrons are worn only by those 
entitled to them. They are worn only on the woolen service 
coat, with the wound chevrons on the right sleeve and the 
service chevrons on the left sleeve. They are worn point 
down. When service stripes are worn the war service chevron 
is above the uppermost service stripe. (See fig. 2.) 
■ 40. Badge.—Soldiers are classified according to the quali- 
fications attained in the use of weapons. The different classi- 
fications are: expert, sharpshooter or Ist class gunner, and 
marksman or 2d class gunner. Should you attain one of 
these classifications you will be entitled to wear a badge 
(fig. 3) which is issued by the War Department. A bar, at- 
tached to the bottom of the badge, shows the weapon with 
which you have qualified. Should you qualify with more than 
one weapon, you will be entitled to wear an additional bar for 
each weapon. 
18 soldier’s handbook 
40 
shoulder sleeve insignia 
( Divisions, ehz.) 
CHEVRONS 
OF GRADE 
SERVICE STRIPES 
-OVERSEAS 
-SERVICE 
WOUND CHEVRONS 
OVERSEAS CHEVRONS 
Figure 2.—Wearing of sleeve insignia. 
EXPERT 
SHARPSHOOTER 
15T CLASS GUNNER 
ZIP CLASS GUNNER 
Figure 3.—Badges for qualification in use of weapons 
Other bars to be attached to basic badges are as follows 
MACHINE RIFLE 
AUTO. RIFLE 
SMALL BORE RIFLE 
BAYONET 
PISTOL-D 
PISTOL-M 
SMALL BORE PISTOL 
MECHANIZED VEHICLE 
WEAPONS 
INF. HOWITZER 
MACHINE GUN 
SMALL BORE M. G. 
SUBMACHINE GUN 
GRENADE 
COAST ARTY. 
FIELD ARTY. 
C. W. S. WEAPONS 
MINES 
AERIAL GUNNER 
AERIAL BOMBER 
ANTIAIRCRAFT WEAPONS 
19 41-44 
soldier’s handbook 
Section II 
OFFICERS AND NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS 
■ 41. Commissioned officers and noncommissioned officers 
also wear the insignia of the arm or service to which they 
belong and in addition certain other distinguishing marks 
which show their grade or authority in the Army. The insig- 
nia of grade worn by all officers on each shoulder loop of 
the coat, overcoat, or olive-drab shirt when worn without the 
coat, are shown in figure 4. 
COLONEL 
(Silver) 
LT. OOL. 
(Silver) 
MAJOR 
(Gold) 
CAPTAIN 
(Silver) 
111 LIEUT. 
(Silver) 
2—0 ueu 
(Gold] 
Figure 4.—lnsignia of rank for officers (worn on shoulder loops). 
B 42. A general officer wears two bands of black braid just 
above the lower edge of each sleeve of the overcoat. 
B 43. Officers of the General Staff Corps wear a band of 
black braid 3 inches from the end of each sleeve of the 
service coat. All other officers wear a similar band of brown 
braid. All warrant officers and enlisted men who served hon- 
orably as officers in the World War wear a similar band of 
forest green braid. 
B 44. Noncommissioned officers wear chevrons of olive-drab 
material on a dark blue background. They are worn on the 
sleeve between the elbow and the shoulder of the olive-drab 
shirt, the coat, the overcoat, and the fatigue uniform. The 
chevrons for the different grades are shown in figure 5. 
20 SOLDIER’S handbook 
MASTER SGT 
O%T Grade) 
TECHNICAL Sat 
(Z'l? Grade j 
1 %J SGT 
(ZdP Grade) 
STAFP SQT 
(35? Grade) 
SERGEANT 
(4 if Grade) 
CORPORAL v 
(5 IS Grade) 
PRIVATE IST CLASS 
(6 Grade) 
Figure s.—Chevrons (insignia of grade) for noncommissioned offi- 
cers and privates, first class (worn on sleeves). 
21 CHAPTER 4 
■ 45. You are going to hear the word “organization” used 
constantly in your military service and it will help you to have 
an early understanding of just what the word means in the 
Army. If you think about it for a moment you will realize 
that, actually, organization is nothing new, for you have 
probably been familiar with its meaning for a long time in 
civil life. In your factory, shop, or office you remember how 
men were grouped according to the machine they operated or 
the type of work they did. The same thing was true in school 
where students were grouped by classes according to their 
progress and the number that each teacher could instruct. 
You are familiar with the way in which your local police and 
fire departments are divided into precincts or districts located 
in different parts of the city with one particular man in 
charge of each station. 
ORGANIZATION 
■ 46. All of this grouping and arranging is for just one pur- 
pose—to get things done in the best way possible and without 
waste of time or effort. If every shop or office worker did only 
the things he wanted to do, and in his own way, his business 
would soon fail for he could not turn out his orders on time. 
If every student studied only the things he was interested in 
and only when he felt like it, we would soon be a nation of 
poorly educated people. If each time a fire occurred, the fire 
chief had to telephone the different firemen and tell them 
what to do, there would be little chance of saving many build- 
ings. So, in order to direct the business workers, students, and 
firemen in their efforts, and to produce efficiency instead of 
confusion, they are divided into groups of a size which experi- 
ence has shown one man can control. In charge of these 
groups are the foremen, chief clerks, teachers, or other group 
leaders you remember in civil life. 
■ 47. The same arrangement exists in the Army and for the 
same purpose. You have been assigned to a company, troop, 
or battery of a certain regiment. In charge of your company, 
22 soldier’s handbook 
47-49 
troop, or battery is an officer who is responsible for feeding, 
clothing, and training you and your comrades, and, finally, 
leading you to victory on the battlefield. He is your team 
captain. Your company, troop, or battery has in it from 100 
to 200 men. If it were always going to be on the drill field, or 
in the barracks, the company commander could probably 
control it with his voice. But your team may not always 
remain in an area where the company commander can di- 
rectly control it. It is training for the time when, if called 
upon, it will meet and defeat the enemy on the battlefield. 
There the distances and noise will make it impossible for the 
company commander to control directly more than a few 
men. So, to make sure that all the members of the team are 
exerting their efforts toward the same end, your company, 
troop, or battery is divided into a number of smaller groups 
called squads, sections, and platoons. 
■ 48. a. In the Infantry and Cavalry the squad is the largest 
unit that can be effectively controlled by the voice and signals 
of its leader—the corporal or sergeant. In size it will vary 
from 4 to 16 members, depending upon the kind of squad 
it is. It takes its name from the principal weapon within 
the squad. For example, in a “rifle squad” the members are 
armed with the rifle; in a “machine-gun squad” the principal 
weapon is the machine gun which members of the squad 
serve, and in a “mortar squad” the principal weapon is the 
mortar. The squad is small enough so that the leader can 
directly control all of its members. 
b. In the Field Artillery and Coast Artillery Corps the 
section is the smallest fighting unit. In these arms, squads 
are sometimes used for purposes of drill or administration. 
For combat, however, the members of the section are usually 
close enough to the gun they serve so that their leader, the 
sergeant, can control them. 
■ 49, Next above the squad or section is the platoon, which is 
commanded by a lieutenant. A platoon includes several 
squads, or two sections, and has a strength of 40 or 50 soldiers. 
By the time we have reached a unit of this size you can see 
how difficult it would be for the lieutenant to control directly 
the actions of all members of the platoon while they are 
23 49-51 
soldier's handbook 
scattered over a large area in combat. He can easily control 
them, however, through his orders to his section or squad 
leaders. 
■ 50. a. Finally we come to your company, troop, or "battery. 
It usually consists of 3 or 4 platoons and is commanded by a 
captain. Because of the way your company is “organized” 
it is possible for the company commander to control and 
direct efficiently the company as a whole through his orders 
to the platoon, section, and squad leaders and still have time 
to plan for the future care and welfare of the company. It 
would not be possible for him to do this if he did not have 
such an “organization”, but had to spend his time con- 
stantly running back and forth, issuing orders to 200 
individuals. 
h. The organization of your company which has been dis- 
cussed above deals with it as a fighting team. But to be 
able to fight effectively, it must be fed, clothed, and supplied 
with the necessary equipment. To assist the company com- 
mander in doing this, he has a company headquarters, whose 
principal noncommissioned officers are the first sergeant, the 
mess sergeant, and the supply sergeant. The first sergeant 
corresponds to the executive, or chief clerk, in a civilian office. 
He handles all of the administrative details of the company 
and publishes the orders of the company commander. The 
mess sergeant with his cooks secures and prepares the food 
you eat, and the supply sergeant issues you your clothing and 
equipment and exchanges it when it has become worn out 
or damaged. Your company is a carefully organized business 
with the various jobs so distributed that the largest possible 
number of men can be made available for its principal job 
of fighting. 
■ 51. The same considerations followed in the organization 
of your company, troop, or battery are carried on upward 
to your regiment. In the Infantry, Field Artillery, and Coast 
Artillery Corps, usually 4 companies or batteries are grouped 
to form a battalion, but there may be only 2 or 3. Similarly, 
in the Cavalry, troops are grouped as squadrons. These 
larger units, battalions or squadrons, are commanded by 
a major or lieutenant colonel. The regiment is composed 
24 soldier’s handbook 
51-53 
of 2 or more—generally 3—battalions or squadrons and is 
commanded by a colonel. So you see how each unit from 
the 4-man squad up to the 500- or 1,000-man battalion fits 
into a definite place in the big regimental team. Each unit 
is so organized that one man will be able to control and 
direct it so that the full power of the team will be directed 
toward a common purpose. 
B 52. In certain arms of the Army you may find that one or 
more of the various units described above are not included 
in the organization for combat of that arm. In the Air 
Corps you will not find the squad, section, or platoon as fight- 
ing teams but only organized temporarily for drill and ad- 
ministrative purposes. The unit to which you will be 
assigned is a squadron, commanded by a major. The squad- 
ron, however, will be divided into sections which are named 
for the duties the members of that section perform. For 
example, the administrative section handles the squadron 
headquarters, mess, and transportation; the technical sec- 
tion does the engineering, supply, communication, photogra- 
phy, and repairs; and the flight section operates and main- 
tains the aircraft of the squadron. 
B 53. In the same way, in certain armored units the small- 
est organization will be the crew of a scout or combat car, 
which will consist of 4 men, one of whom will be an officer 
or noncommissioned officer. Also certain infantry units such 
as tank, antitank, and military police organizations will vary 
in size and numbers. But you will not be confused, in what- 
ever organization you may be, if you will remember the pur- 
pose for which the Army is organized in every arm or service. 
It is necessary to secure the efficient control of all members 
of the team for success in battle. 
273916°—41 2 
25 CHAPTER 5 
CLOTHING? 
Section I. Allowances 54-55 
11. Care of clothing 56-58 
111. Wearing tire uniform. 59 
Paragraphs 
Section I 
■ 54. When you enlisted or were inducted into the Army, you 
made a contract with your Government. Your part of the 
contract was to serve faithfully the United States of America 
against all their enemies. It was an obligation you were glad 
to assume in return for the many privileges you and your 
family have received as citizens of a free nation. As its part 
of the contract the Government agreed to pay, feed, clothe, 
and give you medical care during the time you were in the 
military service. 
ALLOWANCES 
■ 55. You will be issued, without charge, all the articles of 
clothing necessary for the duties you will be required to per- 
form. Whenever any item of this clothing is no longer serv- 
iceable, you may turn it in to your supply sergeant, who will 
replace it without charge. You must remember, however, 
that these articles of clothing are the property of the United 
States and are issued for your use while you are in the mili- 
tary service. If they are lost, damaged by your neglect, or 
unlawfully disposed of, the Government will require you to 
pay for them. 
Section II 
CARE OP CLOTHING 
■ 56. Always remember that your uniform is more than a 
mere suit of clothes that is worn to cover and protect your 
body. It is the symbol of the honor, the tradition, and the 
achievements of our Army. The civilian or soldier who is care- 
less in his dress and appearance is probably careless in every- 
26 soldier's handbook 
56-58 
thing else. You owe it to your comrades, your organization, 
and your Army to be neat and careful in your appearance, for 
officers and men of other organizations will judge your com- 
pany by the impression you make. 
■ 57. By being careful of your uniform, you have many ad- 
vantages over a careless soldier. Your clothing will last 
longer, you will be neater and better dressed, and you will 
make a better impression on your comrades and officers. 
■ 58. The following information will assist you in the care of 
your clothing: 
a. Whenever you wear the uniform, either on or off duty, be 
sure that it is complete and that it conforms to the instruc- 
tions of your post, camp, or station. Have your shirt, coat, 
and overcoat buttoned throughout. Keep your uniform clean, 
neat, and in good repair. 
b. Dandruff, dust, or cigarette ashes on a uniform give a 
bad impression. If possible, keep a whisk broom in barracks 
for brushing your uniform. Promptly replace missing buttons 
and insignia. 
c. Keep your woolen uniforms pressed. This not only im- 
proves the appearance of clothing, but actually increases its 
life. 
d. Clothing not in use should be hung in wall lockers when- 
ever available. If there are no wall lockers, fold your clothing 
carefully and put it away where it will not accumulate dust. 
Uniforms that have become wet or damp should not be folded 
until they are dry. It is also a good idea to inspect clothing 
before putting it away. Missing buttons and rips should be 
attended to as soon as you take off your clothing instead of 
waiting until it is again needed. 
e. Grease spots on uniforms are unsightly and unmilitary. 
The sooner a grease spot is removed, the easier. Usually it 
helps to place a folded clean towel under the soiled part of the 
cloth during the cleaning. The cleaning should be done by 
dampening a clean white cloth with a good commercial clean- 
ing fluid and rubbing gently back and forth in a straight line 
over a larger area than the spot until dry. This usually pre- 
vents leaving a ring on the fabric. Turpentine will remove 
paint spots from clothing if used promptly, before the paint 
gets dry. 
27 58-59 
soldier’s handbook 
/. Insignia and buttons having a gold finish should be 
cleaned with ammonia and water. Don’t use an abrasive, as 
it will remove the gold plating. Rubber bands, manila paper, 
or any material containing sulfur, if near medals, insignia, or 
buttons, will tarnish them. 
g. Keep and wear your service hat in the shape in which it 
is issued. Brush it frequently to remove dust. Be sure that 
the hat cord is sewed on. 
h. (1) In cleaning your boots or shoes, first remove all dirt 
or mud by scraping with a dull instrument such as a sliver of 
wood. Do not use a piece of glass or a knife. Next, wash them 
with a sponge saturated with a heavy lather of castile soap. 
Never use hot water or allow the leather to soak in water. 
Wipe off the lather with the wet sponge and rub the leather 
thoroughly and vigorously with a clean cloth until nearly dry. 
Drying by exposure to the sun, fire, or strong heat will' cause 
the leather to stiffen and crack and is forbidden. Stuffing the 
toes with crumpled paper helps in the drying and tends to hold 
them in shape. After boots or garrison or dress shoes have 
dried, a good polish should be applied, provided that it has 
been authorized by the garrison or unit commander. In the 
case of work shoes an application of dubbing should be well 
rubbed in. 
(2) For other articles of leather equipment, clean as de- 
scribed above. In the case of unfinished leather, while it is 
still moist give it a very light coat of neat’s-foot oil by rubbing 
with a soft cloth moistened with the oil. Any oil not absorbed 
by the leather should be wiped off. If more than a light coat 
of oil is given, the leather will be greatly darkened and will 
soil your clothing. If the leather is to be polished it should be 
cleaned as described above and then polished with a good 
grade of polish in the proper color. 
Section 111 
■ 59. The manner in which your uniform should be worn is 
shown in figure 6. 
WEARING THE UNIFORM 
28 soldier’s handbook 
® Field service. ® Garrison service, dismounted. 
@ Garrison service, mounted. @ Overcoat. 
Figure 6.—Uniforms for enlisted men. 
29 ARMS AND EQUIPMENT 
CHAPTER 6 
Paragraphs 
Section I. Responsibility for care 60-62 
11. Nomenclature and care and cleaning of U. S. rifle, 
caliber .30, Ml 63 
111. Nomenclature, care and cleaning, and safety devices 
of automatic pistol, caliber .45, Ml9ll 64 
IV. Safety precautions 65 
V. The gas mask 66-72 
VI. Field equipment 73-80 
VII. The infantry pack 81-82 
VIII. Packing individual equipment on horse 83-84 
IX. Display of equipment 85 
Section I 
RESPONSIBILITY FOR CARE 
■ 60. The arms and equipment which are issued to you are 
the property of the United States. They are entrusted to your 
care for military use during your period of service in the Army. 
You are responsible for them and it is your duty to see that 
they are properly cared for in the manner in which your 
officers and noncommissioned officers will instruct you. At 
various times you will attend inspections where your com- 
pany commander, or other officers, will carefully check over 
your arms and equipment to see that you are taking the 
proper care of them and that they are clean and in condition 
for immediate active service. You will find that a little atten- 
tion each day to the care and cleaning of your arms and 
equipment will save you time and effort in preparing for these 
Inspections. 
■ 61. Your safety and comfort in the field will depend upon 
the manner in which you keep your arms and equipment. 
You must take particular care not to lose them, as you may 
not toe able to replace them by the time you will need them 
most. Before dark, place everything where you can quickly 
find it in the dark. Remember that carelessness in the pro- 
tection and condition of your arms and equipment may cost 
you your life or health, or that of a comrade. 
■ 62. Since these articles are the property of the United 
States, the Government will require you to pay for them 
30 soldier’s handbook 
62-63 
should they be lost, damaged, or destroyed through your care- 
lessness. 
Section II 
NOMENCLATURE AND CARE AND CLEANING OF U. S. 
RIFLE, CALIBER .30, Ml 
■ 63. The United States rifle, caliber .30, Ml, is gas-operated, 
clip-fed, and air-cooled. It weighs about 9 pounds and the 
bayonet an additional pound. The clip holds 8 rounds. The 
rifle fires each time you squeeze the trigger. The rifle is pro- 
vided with a safety lock. (See fig. 7.) 
a. Disassembling.—The method of disassembling your rifle 
given below is sufficient for cleaning purposes. You should 
learn more detailed disassembling at your first opportunity. 
If you do not receive instructions as to disassembling, go to 
your squad leader, who will gladly show you how. 
(1) The three main, groups.—Grasp the rifle with the left 
hand so that the base of the trigger housing is included in 
the grip of the fingers. (See fig. 8.) Place the butt of the 
rifle against the left thigh. Grasp the rear portion of the 
trigger guard with the thumb and forefinger of the right 
hand and exert sufficient downward pressure to unlatch the 
trigger guard from the trigger housing. Then swing the 
trigger guard away from the trigger housing to the extreme 
opened position as shown in figure 8. Pull out the trigger 
housing group. Place this group on a smooth, clean surface. 
Grasp the rifle over the rear sight with the left hand, muz- 
zle down and barrel to your left. (See fig. 9.) Strike and 
grasp the small of the stock with the right hand so as to sep- 
arate the stock group from the barrel and receiver group as 
shown in figure 9. 
(2) Barrel and receiver group.—(a) Place the group on a 
smooth surface, barrel down and pointing to your left. Grasp 
the follower rod with the left thumb and forefinger at the 
knurled portion and disengage it from the follower arm by 
pressure toward the muzzle. Withdraw the follower rod (with 
compensating spring attached) to the right. (See fig. 10.) 
If necessary, remove the compensating spring from the fol- 
lower rod by grasping the compensating spring with the left 
31 FRONT SIGHT 
STACKING 
STACKING SWIVEL SCREW 
BARREL 
FRONT HAND GUARD 
LOWER BAND 
FRONT HAND 
GUARD FERRULE 
REAR HAND GUARD BAND 
REAR HAND GUARD 
STOCK FERRULE \\ 
STOCK FERRULE SWIVEL 
STOCK FERRULE SCREW 
Figure 7.— U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml. 
OPERATING ROD HANDLE 
\ 
OPERATING ROD 
REAR SIGHT COVER 
REAR SIGHT 
REAR SIGHT NUT- 
-BUTT SWIVEL 
REAR SIGHT BASE 
SHORT BUTT 
PLATE SCREW 
i 
long butt 
PLATE SCREW 
PUATE 
BUTT 
32 Figure 8. 
Figure 9. 
33 SOLDIER'S HANDBOOK 
hand and twisting the follower rod toward your body with the 
right hand, exerting a slight pull to the right. Withdraw the 
operating rod spring. 
Figure 10. 
(b) Drift the follower arm pin from its seat by starting it 
with the point of a bullet (or with the drift of the combina- 
tion tool) held in the right hand and applied on the side of 
the receiver farthest from your body. Pull out the pin from 
the near side with the left hand. Grasp the bullet guide, 
the follower arm, and the operating rod catch assembly and 
pull to the left until these parts are disengaged. Lift out 
and separate these three parts. Do not remove the ac- 
celerator from the operating rod catch assembly, as the ac- 
celerator pin is riveted in its seat. Lift out the follower with 
the follower slide attached. Do not separate the follower 
from the follower slide. 
(c) Grasp the barrel and receiver assembly with the left 
hand and the operating rod handle with the right hand as 
shown in figure 11. Move the operating rod slowly to the 
rear, pulling the operating rod handle upward and away 
34 soldier’s handbook 
from the receiver. This will disengage the operating rod from 
the bolt when the lug on the operating rod slides up into the 
dismount notch of the operating rod guide groove. When the 
operating rod is thus disengaged, remove it with a downward 
and rearward movement. 
Note.—The operating rod has been intentionally bent. Do not 
try to straighten it. 
Figure 11. 
Cd) Grasp the bolt by the operating lug, slide it from rear 
to front, and lift it up and out to the right front with a slight 
rotary motion. (See fig. 12.) 
(3) Gas cylinder.—(a) There are now in existence two 
types of gas cylinders and front sight assemblies for the Ml 
rifle. In the newer or spline type the barrel protrudes beyond 
the gas cylinder, and the front sight screw enters from the 
front and is sealed to prevent tampering. In the older or 
screw-on type the barrel does not protrude and the front 
sight screw enters from the side. 
35 soldier’s handbook 
(b) In order to prevent undue wear, to insure proper main- 
tenance of gas port adjustment, and to avoid improper as- 
sembly, the gas cylinder assembly should not be removed 
except when necessary to replace the front hand guard 
assembly. Before such removal be sure the operating rod has 
been removed. To remove the gas cylinder, proceed as 
follows: 
1. Spline type.—Unscrew gas cylinder lock screw, using 
combination tool. Unscrew gas cylinder lock. 
Tap gas cylinder lightly toward muzzle to re- 
move it from barrel. The front sight will not 
be dismounted from the gas cylinder assembly. 
Do not attempt to adjust the front sight. 
2. Screw-on type-—Remove front sight screw and lift 
out front sight. Unscrew gas cylinder assembly 
from barrel. 
(b) Assembling.—(l) Gas cylinder.—Replace the gas 
cylinder reversing the procedure of the preceding paragraph. 
Figure 12. 
36 soldier’s handbook 
(2) Barrel and receiver group.—(a) Incline the barrel and 
receiver assembly at an angle of approximately 45°, sights 
up, muzzle up and to the front. Hold the bolt by the right 
locking lug so that the front end of the bolt is slightly above 
and to the right of its extreme forward position in the 
receiver. Insert the rear end in its bearing on the bridge 
of the receiver, rotating it in a counterclockwise direction 
sufficiently to permit the tang of the firing pin to clear the 
top of the bridge. Then guide the left locking lug of the 
bolt into its groove at a point just to the rear of the lug on 
the left side of the receiver, and the right locking lug onto 
its bearing in the receiver, and slide the bolt back to its 
extreme rear position. 
(b) Turn the barrel and receiver assembly, in the left hand, 
until the barrel is down. With the right hand, grasp the 
operating rod at the handle. Hold the handle up and insert 
the piston head into the gas cylinder about three-eighths of 
an inch, making sure that the operating rod handle is to the 
left of the receiver. Hold the barrel and receiver assembly 
in the left hand and rotate it to the right until the barrel is 
uppermost. With the right hand, adjust the operating rod 
so that the camming recess on its rear end fits over the op- 
erating lug of the bolt. Press the operating rod forward and 
downward until the bolt is seated in its forward position. 
(c) Place the barrel and receiver assembly on a smooth 
surface, barrel down and muzzle to your left. Replace the 
follower (with the follower slide attached) so that its guide 
ribs fit into their grooves in the receiver, the square hole in 
the follower to the right. Follower slide will rest on bottom 
surface of the bolt when the follower is in position correctly. 
(d) With the left hand replace the bullet guide so that the 
shoulders of the bullet guide fit in their slots in the receiver 
and the hole in the projecting lug is in line with the holes in 
the receiver. 
(e) With the left hand replace the follower arm by passing 
its studded end through the slot in the bullet guide and insert- 
ing the studs in their grooves in the front end of the follower. 
Place the forked end of the follower arm in position astride 
the projecting lug on the bullet guide with the pin holes in 
alinement. Insert the rear arm of the operating rod catch 
37 soldier’s handbook 
through the clearance cut in the bullet guide, making sure that 
its rear end is underneath the forward stud on the clip latch 
which projects into the receiver opening. Aline the holes in 
the operating rod catch, the follower arm, and the bullet guide 
with those in the receiver. Insert the follower arm pin in the 
side of the receiver which is toward your body and press the 
pin home. 
(/) If separated, insert the operating rod spring into the 
operating rod. Assemble the follower rod and the compen- 
sating spring by grasping the spring in the left hand and in- 
serting the follower rod with the right hand, twisting the two 
together so that the compensating spring is fully seated on 
the follower rod. Grasp the knurled portion of the follower 
rod with the thumb and forefinger of the left hand, forked 
end to the right, hump down. Insert the left end of the fol- 
lower rod into the operating rod spring, push to the left, and 
seat the forked end against the studs on the follower arm. 
The hump on the follower rod must be in the slot in the op- 
erating rod catch. 
(3) The three main groups.—(a) Insert the U-shaped flange 
of the stock ferrule in its seat in the lower band. Pivoting 
about this point, guide and press the barrel and receiver group 
into position in the stock. Insert the trigger housing group, 
with the trigger guard in its open position, into the opening in 
the stock. Press it into position and close and latch the trig- 
ger guard. 
(b) Test the assembly as follows: Pull back the operating 
handle to its rearmost position; press down on the follower 
and allow the bolt to go fully home; set the safety in its rear- 
most position; pull the trigger; hammer should not fall; set 
the safety in its foremost position; pull trigger; hammer 
should fall. 
c. Model 1903 rifle.—This rifle is sometimes called the 
Springfield rifle. It is a breech-loading magazine rifle of the 
bolt type. The magazine holds 5 rounds which are ordinarily 
put up in brass clips of 5 for easy loading. The rifle weighs 
about BVz pounds and the bayonet an additional pound. If 
you are equipped with this rifle, learn to disassemble the bolt 
and floor plate as soon as practicable. Your squad leader 
will gladly show you how. 
38 soldier’s handbook 
d. Care of the rifle.—(1) General.—Your rifle is a machine. 
It gives the best results when it is clean and properly lubri- 
cated. A dirty, poorly lubricated rifle may have stoppages 
which will make it useless in battle. Inspect your rifle daily 
and see that it is clean and properly lubricated. Neglect of 
your rifle may cost you your life on the battlefield. 
(2) Cleaning the tore.—Powder fouling in the bore con- 
tains salts. Salts rust steel. To remove these salts, run a 
clean patch which has been saturated with hot water and 
issue soap through the bore a number of times. Plain, clean 
water, hot or cold, should be used when soap is lacking. While 
still wet, the metal brush should be run through the bore 
several times to loosen up any material which has not been 
dissolved by the water. The bore should then be thoroughly 
dried and coated with a light issue gun oil. The chamber is 
included in this process, the chamber cleaning tool being 
used. 
(3) Cleaning gas cylinder. Ml rifle.—Carbon will accumu- 
late from firing. The frequency of carbon removal is a factor 
peculiar to individual rifles. Excess deposits of carbon in the 
rifle show themselves by sluggishness in action and failure to 
feed. 
(a) Spline type.—To remove accumulated deposits of car- 
bon from the gas cylinder, remove the lock screw and remove 
carbon, using the screw driver blade of the combination tool. 
The gas cylinder lock may be removed and the lock screw 
reinserted in the gas cylinder and threaded in enough to 
break loose the carbon. The inside of the gas cylinder should 
be thoroughly wiped clean and oiled at the conclusion of 
firing. (A few drops of oil placed between the rear gas cylin- 
der lug and the operating rod, with the muzzle tipped down, 
will be sufficient if firing is contemplated on the next day. 
Hand operate the rod through a few cycles to distribute the 
oil properly.) The exterior finish should be cleaned and 
lightly oiled. The sight should be kept free from dust and 
dirt. 
(Z>) Screw-on type.—Scrape the carbon from the exposed 
surface of the front of the gas cylinder and gas cylinder plug 
and piston head after extensive firing. Clean the gas cylinder 
plug and the grooves in the gas cylinder to insure correct 
39 soldier’s handbook 
seating of the plug. The frequency of this cleaning depends 
on the amount of firing. A sharp-bladed instrument similar 
to a mess kit knife should be used to remove the carbon from 
the gas cylinder plug and piston head. If an abrasive cloth 
is used care should be taken that the corners of the plug or 
piston head are not rounded. Do not remove the gas cylinder 
for cleaning. The gas cylinder is cleaned by using the clean- 
ing rod and a patch in the same manner followed in cleaning 
the bore. 
(4) Miscellaneous.—(a) All metal parts should be cleaned 
and covered with a uniform light coat of oil. The following 
parts are excepted. They should be lubricated with a thin, 
uniform coating of graphite cup grease issued for that 
purpose. 
1. Bolt lugs (locking and operating). 
2. Bolt guides. 
3. Cocking cam on bolt. 
4. Compensating spring. 
5. Contact surfaces of barrel and operating rod. 
6. Operating rod cam. 
7. Operating rod groove in receiver. 
8. Operating rod spring. 
(b) Wooden parts should be treated with a light coat of 
raw linseed oil not oftener than once a month. 
(c) Screw heads should be kept clean or they will collect 
rust. 
(d) Clips should be kept clean. 
(e) Leather sling should be washed, dried with a rag, and 
lightly oiled with neat’s-foot oil while still damp. You should 
do this whenever the sling shows signs of stiffening or drying, 
(/) To remove rust from metal parts, rub the spot with a 
piece of soft wood and oil. 
(5) Don’ts.—(a) Do not apply graphite cup grease to the 
follower slide or under surface of the bolt. It might get into 
the chamber and cause excessive pressures. 
(b) Do not use sandpaper, metal polish, or other like ma- 
terials on your rifle. They may remove the antirust finish 
on your rifle; then you will have a job on your hands to keep 
it free from rust. 
40 soldier’s handbook 
63-64 
(c) Do not put a plug in the muzzle. It will cause the bore 
to rust. You may forget it is in there and fire the rifle, caus- 
ing it to blow up. 
(d) Do not put off until tomorrow cleaning a rifle that has 
been fired.. The rifle will rust overnight and your job will 
be that much harder. 
(e) Do not over-oil your rifle. Heavy coats of oil will 
collect dirt. 
Section IH 
NOMENCLATURE, CARE AND CLEANING, AND SAFETY 
DEVICES OP AUTOMATIC PISTOL, CALIBER .45, Ml9ll 
■ 64. The automatic pistol, caliber .45, Ml9ll, is a recoil- 
operated, magazine-fed, self-loading, hand weapon. The 
magazine holds 7 rounds. The pistol weighs about 2Vz 
pounds. (See fig. 13.) 
T’iguee 13.—Longitudinal section of pistol, showing component 
parts in assembled position. 
a. The method of disassembling your pistol given below is 
sufficient for cleaning purposes. You should not attempt 
more detailed disassembling until you have received instruc- 
tion from your officers or noncommissioned officers. 
41 SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
(1) Remove the magazine by pressing the magazine catch 
(48). 
(2) Press the plug (16) inward and turn the barrel bush- 
ing (13) to the right until the plug (16) and the end of the 
recoil spring (14) protrude from their seat, releasing the 
tension of the spring (14). As the plug (16) is allowed to 
protrude from its seat, keep your finger or thumb over it so 
that it will not jump away and be lost, or strike you in the 
face. Draw the slide (3) rearward until the smaller rear 
recess in its lower left edge stands above the projection on 
the thumbpiece of the slide stop (8); press gently against 
the end of the pin of the slide stop (8) which protrudes from 
the right side of the receiver (1) above the trigger guard 
and remove the slide stop (8). 
(3) This releases the link (11), allowing the barrel (2), 
with the link (11) and the slide (3), to be drawn forward 
together from the receiver (1), carrying with them the barrel 
bushing (13), recoil spring (14), plug (16), and recoil-spring 
guide (15). 
(4) Remove these parts from the slide (3) by withdrawing 
the recoil-spring guide (15) from the rear of the recoil spring 
(14), and drawing the plug (16) and the recoil spring (14) 
forward from the slide (3). Turn plug (16) to right to re- 
move from recoil spring (14). Turn the barrel bushing (13) 
to the left until it may be drawn forward from the slide (3). 
This releases the barrel (2), which, with the link (11), may 
be drawn forward from the slide (3), and by pushing out the 
link pin (12) the link (11) is released from the barrel (2). 
h. To assemble, proceed in the reverse order. When re- 
placing the slide (3) and barrel (2) on the receiver (1), care 
must be taken that the link (11) is tilted forward as far as 
possible and that the link pin (12) is in place. 
c. The pistol is provided with a number of safety devices 
which you should test frequently. A safety device is a danger- 
ous device if it does not work when expected. The following 
tests will determine whether the safety devices are working 
or not. 
(1) Safety lock.—Cock the hammer and then press the 
safety lock upward into the “safe” position. Grasp the stock 
so that the grip safety is depressed and squeeze the trigger 
42 soldier’s handbook 
three or four times. If the hammer falls, the safety lock is 
not safe and must be repaired. 
(2) Grip safety.—Cock the hammer and, being careful not 
to depress the grip safety, point pistol downward and squeeze 
the trigger three or four times. If the hammer falls, or the 
grip safety is depressed by its own weight, the grip safety is 
not safe and must be repaired. 
(3) Half-cock notch.—Draw back the hammer until the 
sear engages the half-cock notch and squeeze the trigger. If 
the hammer falls, the hammer or sear must be replaced or 
repaired. Draw the hammer back nearly to full cock, and 
then let it slip. It should fall only to half cock. 
(4) Disconnector.—Cock the hammer. Shove the slide one- 
quarter inch to the rear; hold slide in that position and 
squeeze the trigger. Let the slide go forward, maintaining 
the pressure on the trigger. If the hammer falls, the dis- 
connector is worn on top and must be replaced. Pull the 
slide all the way to the rear and engage the slide stop. 
Squeeze the trigger and at the same time release the slide. 
The hammer should not fall. Release the pressure on the 
trigger and then squeeze it. The hammer should then fall. 
The disconnector prevents the release of the hammer unless 
the slide and barrel are in the forward position safely inter- 
locked. It also prevents more than one shot’s following each 
squeeze of the trigger. 
d. Care of pistol.—(l) General.—To prevent wear and tear 
on the working parts of your pistol, keep it clean and properly 
lubricated. A dirty, dry pistol, or one which has been over- 
oiled and allowed to gather dirt will have stoppages that may 
make it useless in battle. A failure of your pistol in battle may 
cost you your life. 
(2) Cleaning the bore.—Powder fouling in the bore contains 
salts. Salts rust steel. To remove these salts, run a cleaning 
patch soaked in hot water and issue soap through the bore a 
number of time. Plain, clean water, hot or cold, should be used 
when soap is lacking. While still wet, the metal brush should 
be run through the bore several times. This will loosen up any 
material which has not been dissolved by the water. The bore 
should then be thoroughly dried and coated with a thin, uni- 
form coat of issue gun oil. 
43 64-65 
SOLDIER’S handbook 
(3) Miscellaneous.—(a) All metal parts should be cleaned 
and covered with a thin, uniform coat of oil. 
(b) Screw heads should be kept clean or they will collect 
rust. 
(c) The magazine should be cleaned with an oily rag. If dirt 
and grit have gotten into it, remove the follower and spring 
and clean the inside. 
(d) Remove rust spots by rubbing with a soft stick and oil. 
(4) Don’ts.—(a) Do not use sandpaper, metal polish, or like 
materials on your pistol. They may remove the antirust finish 
from your pistol, then you will have a job keeping it free from 
rust. 
(b) Do not put a plug in the muzzle of the bore. It will cause 
the bore to rust. You may forget it is in there and fire your 
pistol, causing it to explode. 
(c) Do not lay your pistol down where dirt can get into it. 
(d) Do not fail to inspect your pistol daily in the field. Your 
life may depend on its functioning at the proper moment. 
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 
Section IV 
■ 65. All weapons used in the Army are designed to kill. Re- 
member this and handle them with care. Observe the follow- 
ing rules at all times: 
a. Treat all weapons as though they were loaded until you, 
yourself, have inspected them to see that they are not loaded. 
b. Do not take someone else’s word that the weapon is 
empty. Inspect it. 
c. Each time you pick up a weapon find out if it is loaded by 
inspecting it yourself. 
d. Do not leave a loaded weapon around where someone else 
may unknowingly pick it up. 
e. When you put your weapons away, inspect them to see that 
they are unloaded. 
f. Do not point a weapon at anyone unless you intend to 
kill him. 
g. Load only when you receive orders to. 
44 soldier’s handbook 
65-67 
h. Learn how to use the safety locks before you ever load 
a weapon. 
i. When your weapon is loaded and you are not firing, keep 
the safety lock on, particularly when advancing, as you may 
catch your trigger in brush and kill yourself or comrade. 
j. Do not pick up shells, bombs, hand grenades, and the 
like, until you have been instructed in the handling of such 
ammunition and then only when you receive orders to do so. 
k. Do not pick up any shell or other metal object which 
you may see on the battlefield or firing range. It may be a 
“dud” (an unexploded shell), which may go off when you 
disturb it. 
Z. Be careful what you pick up on the battlefield. A maga- 
zine, newspaper, can of food, and other apparently innocent 
articles may be “bait” for a “fool’s trap”, or “booby” mine 
which will explode when you pick it up. 
Section V 
THE GAS MASK 
■ 66. The American Army service gas mask which is issued 
to you is the best all around military gas mask known. It 
is the main device for protecting your face, eyes, lungs, and 
throat from the effects of gases, smokes, fumes, dusts, and 
chemical fogs, and is made to take care of all the known 
chemical warfare agents. However, it will not protect against 
carbon monoxide or ammonia gas and is not suitable for use 
in fighting fires or in industrial accidents where ammonia gas 
is present. 
■ 67. a. The gas mask consists essentially of a facepiece, a 
hose, and a can containing a filter. This can, called the can- 
ister, is connected by the hose to the facepiece, which fits 
tightly to your face. Air is drawn in through the canister, 
where the objectionable gases, vapors, fogs, dusts, or smokes 
are removed, either mechanically or by chemical action. The 
cleaned air then passes on to the facepiece where it is 
breathed and then expelled through a valve. The drawing 
(fig. 14) illustrates how your gas mask works. 
45 67-68 
soldier’s handbook 
FACE PIECE 
AIR DEFLECTED 
AGAINST EYEPIECES 
BEFORE INHALATION - 
DEFLECTOR - 
AIR EXPELLED 
HERE 
HOSE 
AIR PASSAGE 
MECHANICAL 
FILTER 
CARRIER 
CHARCOAL AND 
SODA LIME - 
/'VCANISTER 
AIR ENTERS HERE 
b. The facepiece is made of rubber or a similar fabric and 
is held to your face by means of an elastic head harness. 
These materials may easily be damaged by carelessness and 
improper use. Pox example, if a facepiece is not properly 
placed in the carrier, or if it is; distorted, a crease might be 
formed which would prevent a positive seal between the face- 
piece and your face. Unless the rim of the facepiece fits 
snugly to your face, gas-laden air may leak in. The elastic 
straps may also become damaged by excessive stretching. 
Figure 14.—How your gas mask works. 
■ 68. Inexperienced persons often make the mistake of pull- 
ing up the head harnesses too tight, or of pulling up one strap 
more than its mate. If you adjust the harness too tightly, 
you will soon get a headache. If you adjust the head harness 
46 SOLDIER’S handbook 
unevenly, a channel and consequent leak between the face- 
piece and your face is often formed. (Fig. 15.) This 
often happens if you put the facepiece on carelessly. 
GAS CHANNEL 
NOT CENTERED 
EYE PIECES 
NOT LEVEL 
® Faulty—front view. 
EYE PIECES 
ARE LEVEL 
@ Correct—front view. 
47 soldier’s handbook 
HEAD PAD 
MOT CENTERED 
GAS 
CHANNEL 
STRAPS 
NOT 
ADJUSTED 
EVENLY 
<D Faulty—rear view. 
HEAD 
CENTERED 
WELL DOWN 
Ctabs 
EQUALLY 
ADJUSTED 
© Correct—rear view. 
Figure 15.—Mask adjustment. 
48 soldier’s handbook 
69-72 
■ 69. The canister is the most important part of your mask, 
for it is here that the air is cleaned and made safe for breath- 
ing. It contains chemicals which will be damaged if water 
gets inside. You must always guard your gas mask canister 
from excess moisture. 
■ 70. You should always be careful of your gas mask. Never 
use it as a seat or pillow. Although it is pretty strong and 
rugged, it will not stand abuse. You should never carry any- 
thing but the gas mask and antidim can in the carrier. 
Socks, tobacco, apples, or other objects may choke up the 
mask, or otherwise injure it. Such objects also prevent quick 
removal of the facepiece from the carrier. The wise soldier 
quickly learns how to inspect his gas mask and makes a daily 
inspection of it as a matter of habit. 
■ 71. Before you become accustomed to it you may find your 
gas mask uncomfortable. But as you become more used to 
wearing it, and as you habitually train yourself to work and 
exercise with it properly adjusted, such discomfort disap- 
pears. It is only by wearing the mask daily and performing 
some sort of work, or drill, while masked that you can train 
your chest and lung muscles to the unaccustomed extra work 
and strain. You also become accustomed to your decreased 
ability to move and see. When adjusting the gas mask at 
the command gas, care in putting it on is more important 
than great speed. However, with practice, you should be able 
to stop breathing for 30 seconds, and in this time the mask 
can be securely and carefully adjusted to your face. 
■ 72. An enemy will try to attack troops who are known to 
be inexperienced or careless in gas mask drill and gas dis- 
cipline. If he suspects that your battalion as a whole is 
liable to go out without gas masks, or that it cannot do a 
reasonable amount of work while masked, or that it fails to 
post gas sentries, he will very likely make a gas attack. To 
beat him, you should always keep your gas mask with you, 
keep it in good condition, and not abuse it. You should know 
how to put it on, and be able to wear it for several hours at 72-75 
soldier’s handbook 
a stretch while fighting or working, and, finally, you should 
always be on the lookout for a gas attack. 
Section VI 
FIELD EQUIPMENT 
■ 73. The articles of field equipment issued to you have been 
developed and manufactured after careful study and experi- 
ment by the War Department, You must keep them in proper 
condition for field service and not remove or change the 
finish of any article. If it becomes necessary to renew any 
worn surfaces your company, troop, or battery commander 
will explain how it is to be done and supervise the work. By 
following the instructions given below you will find that your 
equipment will always be in first class condition for inspec- 
tions and field service. 
■ 74. All cloth equipment should be well brushed frequently 
with a stiff-bristled brush, A dry scrub brush will serve this 
purpose. During ordinary garrison duty it should seldom be 
necessary to wash the equipment. Soiled spots can usually 
be removed by a light local washing. During field service, 
equipment becomes soiled much more rapidly. Dirty equip- 
ment should be given a thorough washing, otherwise it will 
become insanitary and liable to rot. 
■ 75, A white soap is issued for the washing of cloth equip- 
ment, but any good grade of white laundry soap will serve the 
purpose. Strong soap, such as yellow kitchen soap, should 
never be used for washing equipment because it usually con- 
tains a large amount of free alkali and it will fade or bleach 
the material. 
a. Before being washed, the equipment should be thoroughly 
brushed to remove all dust and mud. 
b. Spread the belt, haversack, pack carrier, or other 
article on a clean board or rock and apply the soap solution 
with a scrub brush. After working up a good lather, wash off 
with clear water. A bad grease spot can ordinarily be removed 
by the direct application of soap with the brush, followed by 
a good scrubbing. 
50 soldier’s handbook 
75-79 
c. Always dry washed equipment in the shade. The bleach- 
ing action of the sun on damp fabric is strong. Equipment 
wet from a march in the rain should also be dried in the 
shade if practicable. Excessive fading of equipment can thus 
be reduced. 
■ 76. Such articles as the canteen and the different parts of 
the mess outfit should be kept clean. Water and food should 
not be kept in them longer than necessary. Aluminumware 
should be cleaned with soap and water, although a little sand 
will sometimes assist in the cleaning of canteens. Some- 
times small white particles will be found in canteens which 
have been filled with hard water. These particles are harm- 
less. When not actually in use, the canteen should be 
emptied and the cup left off to dry. 
■ 77. The knife blade is made of tempered steel and when 
put away for long periods should be covered with a light 
film of oil to prevent rust. 
■ 78. Bits, curb chains, and all metal parts issued unpainted 
will be oiled lightly when not in use. When in use they will 
be kept clean and free from rust. Removing paint from metal 
parts which are issued painted is prohibited except under 
the direction of your company, troop, or battery commander. 
■ 79. a. Leather equipment is expensive, and its proper care 
is important because of its value and the fact that if neg- 
lected it soon becomes unserviceable. 
b. Two agents are necessary to the proper care of leather 
equipment—a cleaning agent and an oiling agent. The 
cleaning agent issued is castile or similar type soap; the oiling 
agents are neat’s-foot oil substitute, saddle soap, and harness 
soap. 
c. Neat’s-foot oil is the most satisfactory oiling agent for 
leather. It penetrates the pores and saturates the fibers, 
making them pliable and elastic. Dry leather is brittle, but 
leather oiled excessively will soil the clothing and accumu- 
late dirt. 
d. Leather should be treated with enough oil to make it 
soft and pliable, but should not be given so much oil that 
it will squeeze out. 
51 soldier's handbook 
e. When leather is washed with any soap, some of the 
surface oil is always removed. This leaves the surface, after 
drying, hard and liable to crack. If this surface oil is re- 
placed by direct application of neat’s-foot oil, it is very dif- 
ficult not to apply too much. This has led to the develop- 
ment of saddle soaps, which contain a small amount of 
neat’s-foot oil, so that the surface of the leather after wash- 
ing is not deprived of its oil. 
/. Leather equipment in use should be wiped off daily with a 
damp cloth to remove mud, dust, or other dirt. Under no con- 
ditions should it be cleansed by immersion in water or in run- 
ning water. This daily care is necessary to maintain the ap- 
pearance of the equipment, but is insufficient alone to pre- 
serve it properly. At intervals of from 1 to 4 weeks, depending 
upon circumstances, it is essential that the equipment be 
thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the following instruc- 
tions: 
(1) Separate all parts, unbuckle straps, remove all buckles, 
loops, etc., where possible. 
(2) Wipe off all surface dust and mud with a damp (not 
wet) sponge. Rinse out the sponge and make a lather by 
rubbing it vigorously on white soap. The sponge must not 
contain an excess of water if a thick lather is desired. When 
a creamy lather is obtained, clean each piece of equipment, 
taking care that no part is neglected. Each strap should be 
drawn its entire length through the lathered sponge to remove 
the dirt and sweat from the leather. 
(3) Rinse the sponge again and make a thick lather with 
saddle soap; go over each separate piece with the same care 
as before. 
(4) Allow the leather to become partially dry and then 
rub it vigorously with a soft cloth. The equipment should 
now have a neat, healthy appearance. 
g. If the foregoing instructions have been carefully fol- 
lowed, the leather should now be soft and pliable and no 
further treatment should be necessary. At certain intervals, 
52 soldier’s handbook 
however, it is necessary to apply a small amount of neat’s- 
foot oil. No general rule in regard to the frequency of oiling 
can be given because different conditions of climate and 
service have to be taken into consideration. Experience has 
shown that during the first few months of use a set of new 
equipment should be given at least two applications of neat’s- 
foot oil per month. Thereafter need for oiling is indicated 
by the appearance and pliability of the leather. Frequent 
light applications of oil are much better than infrequent 
heavy applications. 
h. New leather equipment should always be given a light 
application of neat’s-foot oil before it is put into use; clean- 
ing with soap is unnecessary because the equipment is clean. 
i. Whenever leather becomes wet from any cause what- 
ever, it should be slowly dried in the shade. Leather should 
never be dried in the sun or close to a radiator, fire, or other 
heat. 
■ 80. Soon after your equipment is issued to you, you will 
receive instructions from your officers and noncommissioned 
officers as to how the different parts should be assembled so 
that it can be carried or worn. The following table will help 
you in remembering the different items of your equipment 
and how they will be carried. This table includes the basic 
equipment common to the greater portion of our military 
service. Should special equipment be issued to you for par- 
ticular conditions, or should you belong to an arm or service 
which has its own special equipment, you will receive instruc- 
tions as to how it will be carried. 
53 SOLDIER’S handbook 
Article 
Dismounted 
Mounted on horse 
(artillery drivers, 
see next column) 
Driver, horse (ar- 
tillery only) 
Driver, vehicle 
Men mounted in 
vehicle* 
Bag, canvas, field, 
with carrying 
strap. 
Bags, feed and grain 
Belt, pistol, re- 
volver, cartridge, 
or magazine. 
Blankets, wool 
On right side, slung 
by a strap pass- 
ing over left 
shoulder to right 
side. 
On pommel under 
raincoat. 
On seat of saddle, 
oil horse, or on 
limber. 
On right side, slung 
by a strap pass- 
ing over left 
shoulder to right 
side or in/on ve- 
hicle. 
On right side, slung 
by a strap passing 
over left shoulder 
to right side or 
in/on vehicle. 
In pack carrier. 
In cantle or blanket 
In cantle or blanket 
In pack carrier or 
In pack carrier or in 
Carried on back 
roll. 
roll. 
in blanket roll. 
blanket roll. Car- 
Canteen, cup and 
or in cargo ve- 
hicle. 
On belt, left rear,.. 
Slung from off 
Slung from near 
Carried on back 
or in/on vehicle. 
On belt, left rear or 
ried on back or 
in/on vehicle. 
On belt, left rear or 
cover. 
(right) cantle ring 
(left) cantle ring, 
in/on vehicle. 
in/on vehicle. 
and attached to 
off saddlebag. 
off horse and at- 
■ tached to saddle- 
bag. 
Field equipment, enlisted men (other than clothing worn on person) 
54 soldier's handbook 
Glasses, field . 
On right side, slung 
On right side, slung 
by strap passing 
over left shoul- 
der. 
On right side, slung 
by strap passing 
over left shoulder. 
by strap passing 
over left shoul- 
der. 
Handkerchiefs _ 
Haversack 
In blanket roll 
On back, attached 
Near (left) saddle 
bag. 
Near (left) saddle- 
bag, off horse. 
In blanket roll, or 
in saddle bag. 
On back, attached 
to belt. 
Attached to bag, 
canvas, field,near 
saddlebag, or to 
rear of haversack. 
Attached to belt, 
opposite right 
hip. 
In blanket roll. 
On back,attached to 
belt. 
Attached to haver- 
sack, or bag, can- 
vas, field. 
Attached to belt, 
opposite right 
hip. 
Helmet, steel 
to belt. 
Attached to rear of 
haversack. 
Attached to belt, 
opposite right 
hip. 
Attached to near 
(left) saddlebag. 
Attached to belt, 
opposite right 
hip. 
In off (right) sad- 
dlebag. 
Attached to off 
(right) saddlebag, 
off horse. 
Attached to belt, 
opposite right 
hip. 
In ofl (right) sad- 
dlebag, off horse. 
Holster, pistol 
Horseshoes, 2 extra, 
with nails. 
Intrenching tool 
Attached to rear of 
Attached to rear of 
haversack. 
(machete or bolo). 
Kit, grooming, com- 
haversack. 
In off (right) sad- 
dle bag. 
In near (left) sad- 
dlebag. 
In off (right) sad- 
dlebag, off horse. 
In near (left) sad- 
dlebag, off horse. 
plete, and saddle 
soap and sponge. 
Kit, mess, complete. 
In haversack 
In bag, canvas, 
field, in haver- 
sack, or in saddle- 
bag. 
In haversack or in 
bag, canvas, field. 
•Alternative methods for carrying equipment of men mounted in vehicles are prescribed for the reason that types of vehicle 
nature and lengths of march, etc., vary so greatly that the description of only one method for one vehicle will not suffice. 
55 SOLDIER'S HANDBOOK 
Article 
Dismounted 
Mounted on horse 
(artillery drivers, 
see next column) 
Driver, horse (ar- 
tillery only) 
Driver, vehicle 
Men mounted in 
vehicle* 
Laces, shoe, extra.. 
In haversack ...... 
In near (left) sad- 
In near (left) sad- 
In bag, canvas, 
In haversack or in 
Mask, gas, horse .. 
Mask, gas, service.. 
Slung under left 
dlebag. 
Strapped to halter 
under throat 
latch. 
Slung under left 
dlebag, oil horse. 
Strapped to halter 
under throat 
latch. 
Slung under left 
field, in haver- 
sack, or in left 
saddlebag. 
Slung under left 
bag, canvas, field. 
Slung under left 
arm by strap 
arm by strap 
arm by strap 
arm by strap 
arm by strap 
passing over 
passing over 
passing over 
passing over 
passing over right 
right shoulder. 
right shoulder. 
right shoulder. 
right shoulder. 
shoulder. 
Overcoat 
Attached to haver- 
Strapped to pom- 
Strapped across 
Attached to haver- 
Attached to haver- 
sack. 
mel over feed 
seat of saddle, off 
sack, to bag, can- 
sack, to bag, can- 
Pocket, magazine, 
Left front of belt 
bag. 
Left front of belt 
horse. 
Left front of belt... 
vas, field, or 
in/on vehicle. 
Left front of belt... 
vas, field ,or in/ on 
vehicle. 
Left front of belt. 
web, double. 
Pouch, first-aid 
Right rear of belt... 
Right rear of belt... 
Right rear of belt—. 
Right rear of belt... 
Right rear of belt. 
packet. 
Raincoat 
In haversack 
Attached to pom- 
mel over feed 
bag. 
Strapped across 
seat of saddle, off 
horse. 
In haversack, in 
bag, canvas, field, 
or in/on vehicle. 
In haversack, in 
bag, canvas, field, 
or in/on vehicle. 
Field equipment, enlisted men—Continued 
56 SOLDIER'S handbook 
Rations 
In haversack 
Distributed be- 
tween the two 
saddlebags to 
balance load. 
On bars of saddle 
in rear of cantle. 
Distributed be- 
tween the two 
saddlebags of 
horse to balance 
load. 
Across seat off 
saddle or on bars 
of saddle in rear 
of cantle, ofl 
horse. 
In haversack, in 
bag, canvas, field, 
or in saddlebags. 
Motorcyclists—in 
rear of seat. 
In haversack or in 
bag, canvas, field. 
Attached to left side 
of haversack. 
In blanket roll. 
In blanket roll. 
Attached to belt. 
Around neck, under 
shirt. 
Saddlebags, pair..- 
Scabbard, bayonet _ 
Attached to left 
side of haversack. 
Attached to near 
(left) side of 
saddle, under 
skirt. 
In near (left) sad- 
dlebag. 
In near (left) sad- 
dlebag. 
In off (right) sad- 
dlebag, or over 
saddle blanket. 
Attached to belt 
Around neck, 
under shirt. 
Attached to vehicle 
In blanket roll or 
in saddlebag. 
In blanket roll or 
in saddlebag. 
Attached to belt - — 
Around, neck, 
under shirt. 
In near (left) sad- 
dlebag, off horse. 
In near (left) sad- 
dlebag, off horse. 
Attached, one to 
each saddlebag, 
ofl horse. 
Attached to belt 
Around neck, 
under shirt. 
In blanket roll 
Tag, identification, 
with tape. 
Around neck, 
under shirt. 
•Alternative methods for carrying equipment of men mounted in vehicles are prescribed for the reason that types of vehicles, 
nature, and lengths of march, etc., vary so greatly that the description of only one method for one vehicle 'will not suffice. 
273916°—41 3 
57 SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
Article 
Dismounted 
Mounted on horse 
(artillery drivers 
see next column) 
Driver, horse (ar- 
tillery only) 
Driver, vehicle 
Men mounted in 
vehicle* 
Tent, shelter 
half, 
In pack carrier, 
Covering (pole, 
Covering (pole. 
Covering (pole, 
Covering (pole, 
complete 
with 
carried on back, 
rope, and pins 
rope, and pins 
rope, and pins 
rope, and pins 
pole, rope, 
and 
or in vehicle. 
within) blanket 
within) blanket 
within) blanket 
within) blanket 
pins. 
roll, on cantle or 
roll, carried on 
roll, carried in/on 
roll, carried on 
in/on vehicle. 
seat of saddle, 
oil horse or on 
limber. 
vehicle. 
back or in/on ve- 
hicle. 
Towel, face 
In haversack 
In near (left) sad- 
dlebag. 
In near (left) sad- 
dlebag, off horse. 
In haversack, in 
bag, canvas, field, 
or in saddlebag. 
In haversack or in 
bag, canvas, field. 
Trumpet 
Suspended on right 
Suspended on right 
side by strap 
Suspended on right 
side by strap 
side by strap 
passing over left 
passing over left 
passing over left 
shoulder. 
shoulder. 
shoulder. 
Underclothing 
In blanket roll. 
In near (left) sad- 
In near (left) sad- 
In blanket roll, in 
In blanket roll. 
Carried on back 
dlebag, or 
dlebag, ofl horse, 
bag, canvas, field, 
Carried on back 
or in cargo ve- 
blanket roll. 
or in blanket roll. 
or in saddlebag. 
or in cargo vehicle. 
hide. 
Whistle (chain, 
In left pocket, shirt 
In left pocket, shirt 
In left pocket, shirt 
In left pocket, shirt 
In left pocket, shirt 
hooked to 
left 
or coat. 
or coat. 
or coat. 
or coat. 
or coat. 
shoulder 
loop 
buttonhole). 
‘Alternative methods for carrying equipment of men mounted in vehicles are prescribed for the reason that types of vehicles, 
nature, and lengths of march, etc., vary so greatly that the description of only one method for one vehicle will not suffice. 
Field equipment, enlisted men—Continued 
58 soldier's handbook 
81-82 
THE INFANTRY PACK 
Section VII 
■ 81. The Infantry Pack.—The normal way In which you 
will carry your basic equipment is given in the table in para- 
graph 80. In this section is described and illustrated the 
proper way for you to assemble your pack with full field 
equipment, to adjust it, and to discard the roll without 
removing the remainder of the equipment from your body. 
■ 82. Method op Assembling Haversack and Pack Carrier.— 
a. Belt.—(1) Pistol or revolver belt (fig. 16).—Place belt on the 
ground, outer side of belt down. Insert hook end of belt 
through sliding keeper, then through unattached male buckle 
with stud down, double belt back through sliding keeper and 
secure end hook in the particular center eyelet required to 
give proper length. Slide magazine pouch over attached 
female buckle end and attach it to the fastener provided. The 
belt is put on with male buckle on the man’s right. 
Figure 16.—Pistol belt. 
(2) Cartridge or magazine belt (fig. 17).—Place adjusting 
strap on the ground, eyeleted edge to the front; place pocket 
sections on the ground in prolongation of adjusting strap, 
pockets down, tops of pockets to the front; insert end of 
adjusting strap in outer loop of metal guide from the upper 
side, carry it under middle bar and up through inner loop; 
engage hooks on the end of adjusting strap in eyelets provided 
on inner surface of belt. The belt is adjusted to fit the 
individual. It should fit loosely about the waist so that when 
buckled it may rest well down over hip bones and below the 
pit of the abdomen. Care should be taken that adjustments 
are made equally from both ends of adjusting strap so that 
59 SOLDIER'S handbook 
® Empty. 
® Filled. 
Figure 17.—Belt, cartridge, or magazine. 
Figure 18.—Haversack without pack carrier. 
60 soldier’s handbook 
center eyelet will be in the middle of belt. The proper posi- 
tion of the belt is the same, whether filled or empty. 
b. To attach pack carrier to haversack (figs. 18 and 19). 
Spread haversack on the ground, inner side down, outer flap 
and meat can pouch to the front. Place button-holed edge 
of pack carrier, lettered side of pack carrier up, under but- 
ton-holed edge of haversack. Superimpose button holes of 
haversack upon corresponding ones of pack carrier. Lace 
the pack carrier to haversack by passing the ends of cou- 
pling strap down through corresponding button holes of 
haversack and pack carrier nearest the center, bringing the 
ends up through next button holes and continuing to the 
right and left, respectively, to the sides. 
SNAP HOOK 
.HAVERSACK 
MEAT CAN POUCW 
SNAP HOOK 
UPPER BINDING STRAP 
FRONT PACK SUSPENDER* 
FRONT PACK SUSPENDER 
MIDDLE BINDING STRAP t 
LOOP FORBAYONET SCABBARD 
LOWER BINDING STRAP 
- REAR BELT SUSPENDER 
BUTTON HOLED EDGE 
-COUPLING STRAP 
U.S. 
~ PACK CARRIER 
CARRIER BINDING STRAP 
SUSPENSION D RINGS 
® Before joining (outside view). 
Figure 19.—Haversack and pack carrier. 
61 82 
soldier’s handbook 
© After joining (outside view). 
OUTER FLAP- 
* INSIDE FLA? 
Figure 19.—Haversack and pack carrier—Continued. 
® Inside view. 
62 soldier’s handbook 
c. To attach haversack.—(l) To cartridge or magazine 
belt.—Place haversack and pack carrier (assembled) on the 
ground, inner side down; place belt along the junction of 
haversack and carrier, pockets down, tops toward the haver- 
sack: insert hooks on rear belt suspenders in upper rear eye- 
lets of each belt section so that point of hooks will be on 
the outside of belt; twist front belt suspenders toward the 
ends of belt and insert snap hooks in eyelets between first 
and second pockets from each end of belt so that the points 
of the snap hooks will be on the outside of belt and sus- 
penders will be flat on the body. 
(2) To pistol or revolver belt.—Proceed as with the car- 
tridge belt, the hooks on the ends of front belt suspenders 
being inserted in the third eyelets from the buckle, and 
hooks on rear belt suspenders in two of the upper eyelets 
respectively to right and left of center of belt. 
d. To attach bayonet scabbard.—(1) To haversack.—At- 
tach scabbard by passing its lower end through loops provided 
on the side of haversack body; then engage double hook at- 
tachment in eyelets on outer flap of haversack, inserting hook 
from the under side. Place bayonet in scabbard, ring to the 
rear. (See fig. 25@.) 
(2) To cartridge belt.—When the haversack is not carried, 
attach scabbard to left side of cartridge belt over left hip. 
Place bayonet in scabbard, ring to the front. 
e. To attach intrenching tool or machete carrier to haver- 
sack.—Fold outer flap of haversack over so that meat can 
pouch is uppermost; pass intrenching tool carrier under- 
neath meat can pouch and engage double hook attachment 
in eyelets in flap provided, inserting hooks from the under 
side. Secure intrenching tool to roll by means of third haver- 
sack binding strap. (See fig. 25®.) 
/. To make the roll (fig. 20).—Spread shelter half on the 
ground and fold in triangular end so that shelter half forms 
a rectangle. Make a second fold by carrying folded edge to 
opposite edge. Fold the blanket twice parallel to its longer 
axis so that blanket is now one-fourth its previous width, and 
then fold once at the middle so as to bring the ends together. 
Place blanket symmetrically in center of folded shelter half; 
place underwear, socks, and handkerchief between folds of 
63 soldier’s handbook 
blanket. Place tent pole on that end of the blanket from 
which the rolling is to begin. Place pins as shown in figure 
20®. (An alternate method is to place pins next to and par- 
allel with pole.) Fold sides and then the near end of shelter 
half snugly over the blanket; fold 10 inches of far end of 
shelter half toward the blanket and, beginning at near end, 
roll tightly into folded end of shelter half, thus making an 
envelope roll. 
g. To pack the haversack (fig. 21).—(1) Place equipment 
on the ground, inside of haversack up, pockets of belt up, 
haversack spread out, inside flap and pack carrier extended 
to their full length. Place rations in the center of haversack 
in front of and touching line of attachment of inside flap. 
Place toilet articles in front of rations. Fold inside flap of 
haversack over these articles. Fold sides of haversack over 
rations and toilet articles. Pass upper two binding straps 
through loop opposite point of attachment of the strap to 
haversack body. Fasten each strap by passing end of strap 
through the opening of its opposite buckle next to the buckle 
attachment, over center bar and back through opening of 
buckle away from attachment. Pull strap tight and make 
fastening secure. Fold over outer flap of haversack and 
fasten it by means of the lower haversack binding strap 
passed through the buckle on inside of outer flap. Pull strap 
towards the right, drawing outer flap snugly over filled haver- 
sack. The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready 
for recention of the roll. 
(2) When rations are not carried, roll toilet articles in in- 
side flap so that top of toilet articles will be on line with top of 
haversack body. Then fold up lower haversack strap against 
the roll thus formed. 
h. To assemble the pack (fig. 22).—Place roll in pack carrier 
and haversack with one end against bottom of packed haver- 
sack. Grasp lower suspension rings, one in each hand. Place 
right knee against bottom of roll. Pull carrier down and 
64 soldier’s handbook 
© First step. 
® Second step. 
Figure 20.—T0 make the roll. 
65 soldier’s handbook 
® Third step. 
Figure 20.—To make the roll—Continued. 
® Completed roll. 
® First step. 
Figure 21.—T0 pack the haversack. 
66 soldier’s handbook 
force roll up close against bottom of packed haversack. 
Without removing the knee, fasten lower pack carrier bind- 
ing strap over the roll and secure it by passing, from below, 
its end up through the opening of its corresponding buckle 
away from the buckle attachment, then over center bar and 
down through opening of the buckle next to buckle attach- 
ment, then back underneath the standing end of strap. In a 
® Second step. 
Figure 21.—T0 pack the haversack—Continued, 
similar manner secure middle haversack binding strap and 
then upper carrier binding strap. Engage snap hooks on 
pack suspenders in lower suspension rings. In order to obtain 
the maximum benefit from the shoulder loops in suspending 
the pack on the wearer, each pack should be so assembled 
that when the roll is carried the length of the assembled 
haversack and pack carrier is at least 27 inches. This may 
67 soldier’s handbook 
be done by placing clothing or equipment ordinarily carried 
elsewhere in the ration space in the haversack so that the 
assembled pack will be the same length as when rations are 
carried. When this method is used, the pack carrier will not 
be folded under. 
Figure 22.—Pack assembled. 
i. To fold and attach the overcoat (figs. 23 and 24).—Turn 
sleeves inside out, place overcoat on the ground, outside down, 
coat smooth, collar extended, sleeves smooth and extended 
toward pockets; move inside flap of tail under outside flap 
about 6 inches and gather the slack in the coat thus caused in 
one fold along middle seam, tapering toward the collar. Fold 
bottom of front edges of coat about 12 inches toward center 
seam, forming an approximate parallelogram, the side of 
which across the coat will be 42 inches. Fold collar end 
down about 15 inches at the top and roll smoothly and tightly 
68 soldier’s handbook 
toward the tail; turn tail up to a depth of about 9 inches, and 
roll entire coat into this pocket. Place the overcoat thus 
rolled, open side of roll down, on top of haversack, in rear of 
bayonet handle so that center back seam is over center of 
top of haversack. Secure coat at the top with a shelter half 
rope. Bind the ends of overcoat down and along the sides 
of haversack. Lash the ends of roll to haversack with the 
rope, using a half hitch near each end of overcoat and passing 
the rope around haversack over outside flap. 
Figure 23.—T0 fold the overcoat. 
® First step 
j. To attach the raincoat.—Fold raincoat neatly into a 
rectangle about 10 V 2 inches long by BV2 inches wide, with 
outside of raincoat out. Place raincoat between inner and 
outer haversack flaps. Secure it with lower haversack bind- 
ing strap by passing the latter under bottom haversack 
binding strap and fastening it tightly to the buckle on under 
side of outer haversack flap. 
69 soldier’s handbook 
©Second step. 
Figure 23.—T0 fold the overcoat—Continued. 
® Completed fold. 
70 soldier’s handbook 
k. To attach the helmet.—Attach and secure the helmet by 
placing chin strap over meat can pouch. 
Z. To adjust full equipment.—Put on equipment, slipping 
the arms through pack suspenders as through sleeves of a 
coat. By means of adjusting buckles on belt suspenders, 
raise or lower the belt until it rests well down over hip bones 
and below pit of abdomen. Raise or lower it in rear until 
Figure 24.—Fu1l equipment with overcoat and raincoat. 
adjusting strip lies smoothly across small of the back. By 
means of adjusting straps on pack suspenders, raise or lower 
the load on the back until the top of haversack is on a 
level with top of shoulders, so that pack suspenders from 
their point of attachment on the haversack to the shoulders 
will be horizontal. The latter is essential to proper adjust- 
ment of the load. (See fig, 25.) 
m. To discard the roll without removing equipment from 
the body.—Unsnap pack suspenders from suspension rings 
71 SOLDIER’S handbook 
® Left rear view. 
© Right rear view. 
® Front view. 
Figure 25.—Pu1l equipment (less overcoat). 
72 SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
82-84 
and snap them into eyelets on top of belt and in rear of 
rear pockets of right and left pocket sections. Support bot- 
tom of pack with left hand, with right hand grasp coupling 
strap at its middle and withdraw first one side and then the 
other. Pull down on the roll with both hands and remove 
it. When the roll has been removed, lace coupling strap 
through buttonholes along upper edge of carrier. 
Section VIII 
■ 83. The method of packing your saddle is very important 
in keeping your mount in top condition and able to with- 
stand hard work. You must distribute the weight evenly 
on your horse’s back. Pressure resulting from an uneven 
distribution of arms and equipment may result in sores or 
cause injury to its withers and back. Consequently, balance 
the weight of articles attached to one side of the saddle as 
nearly as possible by the weight of articles attached to the 
other side. Weight is carried better by the pommel than 
by the cantle. 
PACKING INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT ON HORSE 
■ 84. a. In this paragraph the method of packing indi- 
vidual equipment on horse is described and illustrated, 
h. To assemble and pack the cantle or blanket roll.—(1) 
The shelter tent half is spread flat on the ground, buttons 
up. The triangular flap is folded over shelter tent half, 
making the latter a rectangle. The blanket is folded once 
through the center, parallel to short side, and again through 
the center perpendicular to short sides. The blanket is then 
laid on shelter tent half, the longer folded edge parallel to 
and 1 inch from long side of shelter tent half, opposite the 
buttons, the shorter folded edge toward triangular flap, the 
blanket equidistant from ends of shelter tent half. 
(2) The tent pole, folded, is inserted in double fold of 
blanket, end of pole flush with shorter folded edges, the pole 
parallel to and fitting snugly into the double fold. The tent 
pins are inserted in double fold of blanket, near loose edges, 
placed alternately head and point and overlapping each 
other so as to occupy about the same space as the tent pole, 
the pins parallel to and fitting snugly into double fold of 
73 SOLDIER’S handbook 
blanket. This leaves a “break” at center of completed roll 
which allows it to fit the saddle. 
(3) The free ends of shelter tent half are folded over cor- 
responding portions of the blanket, the ends of shelter half 
throughout their length being parallel to its center line. As 
a prevention against the ends of completed roll pulling out, 
the free (loop) end of tent rope is passed several times 
through tent pin loops on the two opposite corners of button 
side of shelter tent half, stretched flat, and tied with a single 
bow-knot. The button side of roll is folded back about 6 
inches (as far as second button) in order to form a pocket 
when roll is completed, edge of pocket being parallel to edge 
of blanket. 
(4) Using the hands and knees, the blanket and shelter tent 
half are rolled tightly from side opposite buttons into pocket at 
button side, making a tightly bound roll. The roll is then 
“broken” or curved to fit the cantle of saddle, with free edge 
of pocket uppermost and to the rear, so that this edge fits 
snugly against the roll and prevents entrance of rain or snow 
when roll is on the saddle. It is advisable for two men to work 
together in making up the roll. 
c. To fold the raincoat or overcoat.—The raincoat, inside 
out, with collar extended is folded once lengthwise. It is 
rolled tightly from folded edge toward buttons, making length 
of roll the same as full length of garment. If the overcoat 
is carried, it is rolled in the same manner as the raincoat. 
d. Feed and grain hag.—The grain bag, with or without 
grain, is secured inside the feed bag. 
e. To pack the saddle (fig. 26).—(1) The saddle, off the 
horse, is placed on the ground or otherwise as is most con- 
venient for packing. The saddlebags are placed on the cantlc 
and secured thereto by the attachments provided. The cantle 
roll is strapped to the cantle by means of the cantle straps 
which are wrapped three times around the roll. The straps 
are securely buckled and the loose ends, falling to the front, 
are tucked under the straps. The buckles should be far 
enough to the rear to prevent injury or discomfort to the 
trooper. The ends of the roll are pressed forward and down 
74 soldier’s handbook 
toward the saddlebags. The two outside straps should pass 
over the roll well down toward its ends in order to keep the 
roll curved to the shape of the cantle. 
(2) The feed bag and grain bag are strapped on top of the 
pommel bar (under the raincoat or overcoat), regardless of 
whether grain is carried. The loose ends of the straps, falling 
to the rear, are tucked under the straps. The raincoat, and/or 
overcoat, collar to the left, is placed on top of feed and grain 
Figure 26.—Saddle, packed. 
(T) Near side. 
bag and strapped on by means of the pommel straps. The 
ends of the roll are pressed in toward the horse’s shoulders. 
All buckles should be far enough forward to prevent injury or 
discomfort to the trooper. 
(3) The canteen and cup, in their cover, are snapped to the 
right cantle ring. The cover is fastened tight to the saddle- 
75 SOLDIER’S handbook 
bag by buckling the two rear saddlebag cover straps over the 
canteen cover strap where it passes under the bottom of the 
canteen cover. 
(4) Attach helmet to near (left) saddlebag by buckling the 
three straps of saddlebag flap through the chin strap. 
(5) The rifle scabbard is secured to left side of saddle, at- 
tached to the pommel ring by the upper strap of scabbard and 
to cantle ring by lower strap. Both straps are so adjusted 
that the scabbard will hang at an angle of 30° with the verti- 
cal. The rifle is not inserted in the scabbard until after the 
horse is saddled. 
Figure 26.—Saddle, packed—Continued 
© Off side. 
(6) Wherever possible, two men work together in placing 
the packed saddle on the horse’s back. In case only one man 
is available, it may be found advisable to attach saddlebags, 
canteen, cup and cover, and rifle scabbard after the horse has 
been saddled. 
/. Drivers (artillery).—(1) General.—ln order to equalize 
loads on the two horses, certain articles, as prescribed by 
the table shown in paragraph 80 may be placed on saddle of 
the off horse instead of on riding horse. 
76 soldier's handbook 
(2) To 'pack feed hags.—To pack feed bags, fill the grain 
bags; tie mouths securely and place a filled grain bag in each 
feed bag, mouths of grain bags down. Roll feed bags, securing 
closed ends by means of web straps at ends of feed bags. 
The snap ends of the straps are either snapped in the rings 
on feed bags or tucked under turns in straps. The open ends 
of the two feed bags are closely secured together to prevent 
lower ends from rubbing against traces. When grain is not 
carried, fold empty grain bags and place them inside feed 
bags. Roll feed bags along their longer edges and secure as 
above. 
(3) To pack saddle.—To pack the saddle of the off horse, 
the near stirrup being passed over seat of saddle, the pro- 
cedure is as follows: 
(a) The saddlebags are placed on cantle and secured by 
attachments provided. 
(b) Place surcingles under straps of saddlebag flaps above 
the loops in saddlebag flaps through which the straps pass. 
(c) Attach mounted canteen cover to left rear cantle ring 
by the snap of canteen strap. 
id) Attach helmet to off (right) saddlebag by buckling the 
three straps of saddlebag flap through the chin strap. 
(e) Extend center cantle strap. Place roll on top of buckle 
end of cantle strap in the center of seat of saddle so that 
open edge will be down. Place the two feed bags, secured 
together at their open ends, across seat of saddle in front of 
roll. Bring tongue end of cantle strap to the front over 
center of roll and junction of the two feed bags; take one 
turn around the junction of the two feed bags; pass strap 
to rear under roll, bring it forward over center of roll, and 
buckle it. Each coat strap is passed under rear quarter strap 
and once around feed bag about 4 inches from the lower end, 
punching a throat in feed bag to prevent strap from slipping; 
pass each strap to rear and once around roll about 6 inches 
from end of roll; bring strap from under roll, over itself at 
the interval between feed bags, roll and buckle. The ends 
of roll are drawn close to ends of feed bags before being 
secured. The coat straps are attached to saddle bag side— 
strap rings about saddlebag side straps to avoid twisting the 
rings. 
77 SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
(/) Place overcoat, collar, to the left, across seat of saddle 
in front of feed bags and secure by two pommel coat straps. 
When raincoat and overcoat are both carried, place raincoat 
on top of overcoat. When overcoat is not carried, raincoat 
is packed as provided for overcoat. (See fig. 27.) 
Figure 27.—Driver’s (artillery) off horse. 
(4) To pack saddle of the off horse when blanket rolls and 
feed bags carried on limber.—To pack the saddle of the off 
horse, the near stirrup being passed over seat of saddle, the 
procedure is as follows: 
(a) Place the saddlebags on the seat of the saddle and 
secure them by passing the saddlebag straps through the 
cinch rings and drawing them tight. 
(b) Place the overcoat on top of the saddlebags, collar to 
the left; place the raincoat on top of the overcoat. Take a 
couple of turns with the middle cantle strap around the two 
coats. Then take several turns around each end of the 
coats, using a coat strap on each end. Place the free end of 
each strap through the cinch ring on each side and pull the 
coats down firmly against the saddle. 
78 SOLDIER’S handbook 
84-85 
(c) Secure end of halter tie rope of off horse to off pommel 
ring of off saddle, and that of near horse to near pommel 
ring of near saddle. 
DISPLAY OF EQUIPMENT 
Section IX 
85. a. As mentioned in paragraph 60, you will attend inspec- 
tions at which you will be required to display your field equip- 
ment. At these inspections your officers will check your field 
equipment to see that no items are missing and that all items 
are clean and in condition for immediate field service. Fig- 
ure 28 shows how your equipment should be displayed if you 
are a dismounted soldier or equipped with a haversack and 
pack carrier. 
Pigure 28.—Display of equipment, dismounted. 
79 soldier’s handbook 
h. Figure 29 shows how your equipment should be displayed 
if you are a mounted soldier. 
Figure 29.—Display of equipment, mounted. 
80 CHAPTER 7 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER Without Arms (DISMOUNTED) 
Paragraphs 
Section I, Positions 86- 90 
11. Steps and marchings 91-102 
Section I 
POSITIONS 
■i 86. Position op the Soldier, or op Attention (fig, 30). 
To take the position of attention place your heels together and 
on the same line. Allow your feet to turn out equally, forming 
an angle of 45° with each other. Keep your knees straight but 
without stiffness. Draw your hips up under your body slightly. 
Keep your chest up and your shoulders back. Do not allow 
one shoulder to be higher than the other. Keep your arms 
straight without stiffness, and hanging at your sides, in such a 
way that your thumbs are always along the seams of your 
trousers. Turn the backs of your hands out away from your 
body and allow your hands and fingers to cup naturally. Al- 
ways keep your eyes straight to the front. When standing 
properly the weight of your body will be divided equally be- 
tween the heels and balls of both feet. When assuming the 
position of attention, bring your heels together smartly and 
audibly. 
■ 87. Rests.—Being at the halt the commands are: PALL 
OUT; REST; AT EASE; and 1. parade, 2. REST. 
a. At the command fall out, you may leave your position in 
ranks but must remain in the immediate vicinity. At the com- 
mand fall in, resume your position in ranks and stand at 
attention. When on the march, you fall in at ease unless you 
were at attention when the command fall out was given. 
b. While at rest it is required that you keep one foot in place 
in ranks. At the command rest, except for keeping one foot 
in place, you may move around and talk. 
81 87-88 
soldier’s handbook 
c. At the command at ease, you are authorized to move 
around but must keep your right foot in place in ranks. Silence 
is always maintained while at ease. 
d. parade rest is a movement that is executed in unison by 
all soldiers in ranks. At the command of execution (REST) of 
1. parade, 2. REST, move your left foot smartly 12 inches to 
the left of your right foot. As at attention, your knees are kept 
straight without stiffness, and the weight of your body rests 
equally on both feet. At the same time your foot is moved, 
clasp your hands behind your back, palms to the rear, the 
thumb and fingers of your right hand clasping your left thumb. 
As at attention, you are required to maintain both silence and 
immobility. 
Figure 30.—Position of the soldier, or of attention. 
e. Being at any of the rests, except fall out, you resume the 
position of attention at the command of execution (ATTEN- 
TION) of 1. squad, 2. ATTENTION. 
■ 88. Eyes Right or Left.—The commands are: 1. eyes, 2. 
RIGHT (LEFT), 3. ready, 4. FRONT. 
a. At the command right, turn your head and eyes to the 
right. 
82 soldier’s handbook 
88-90 
b. At the command left, turn your head and eyes to the left. 
c. At the command front, turn your head and eyes to the 
front. 
■ 89. Pacings.—All facings are executed from the halt and in 
the cadence of quick time. The commands are: 1. right 
(left), 2. FACE; and 1. about, 2. FACE. 
a. At the command FACE of 1. right, 2. FACE, slightly raise 
your left heel and your right toe; turn 90° to the right by pivot- 
ing on the right heel. This movement is assisted by pushing 
slightly with the ball of your left foot. Hold your left leg 
straight without stiffness. The second part of this movement 
consists in placing your left foot alongside of your right and 
assuming the position of attention. 
b. At the command FACE of 1. left, 2. FACE, you execute the 
above movement in a corresponding manner to the left and on 
your left heel. 
c. At the command FACE of 1. about, 2. FACE, place the 
toe of your right foot a half-foot length in rear and slightly 
to the left of your left heel. Do not move your left foot. Keep 
the weight of your body mainly on your left heel. Keep your 
right leg straight without stiffness. The second part of this 
movement consists in turning your body 180° to the right on 
your left heel and the ball of your right foot. Now place your 
right heel beside your left. If you do this movement properly 
you will find you have turned exactly 180° and your heels 
come together on the same line without the necessity of mov- 
ing either foot forward or backward. 
■ 90. Salute With the Hand (fig. 31).—a. The commands 
are: 1. hand, 2. SALUTE. At the command salute, raise your 
right hand smartly until the tip of your forefinger (index 
finger) touches the brim of your headdress, above and slightly 
to the right of your right eye. If you are without cap or hat, 
the tip of your forefinger touches your forehead above and 
slightly to the right of your right eye. In either case you 
keep your thumbs and fingers extended and joined, palm to 
the left, and the hand and wrist straight. You also keep your 
upper arm horizontal and the forearm inclined at an angle of 
45°. At the same time, you turn your head and eyes toward 
the person you are saluting. The second, part of this move- 
83 90-91 
SOLDIER'S handbook 
ment consists in dropping your arm to your side and turning 
your head and eyes to the front. 
b. You execute the first position of the hand salute when 
the person you are saluting is six paces from you or at his 
nearest point of approach if more than six paces. You hold 
that position until your salute has been returned or until the 
person saluted has passed you if he does not return the salute. 
You then, execute the second movement of the hand salute. 
Figure 31.—Hand Salute 
Section II 
STEPS AND MARCHINGS 
■ 91. a. All steps and marchings that are executed from the 
halt, except right step, begin with the left foot. 
h. Whenever necessary your instructor will indicate the 
cadence to you by calling “One,” “Two,” “Three,” “Four,” as 
your left and right foot, respectively, touch the ground. 
c. All steps and marchings are executed at attention except 
1. ROUTE STEP, 2. MARCH and 1. AT EASE, 2. MARCH. 
84 soldier’s handbook 
92-94 
W 92. Quick Time.—Being at the halt the commands to move 
forward in quick time are: 1. forward, 2. MARCH. At the 
command forward, you shift the weight of your body to the 
right leg without making any noticeable movement. Do not 
start to move forward. At the command march, step off 
smartly with your left foot and continue to march with 
30-inch steps straight to the front, at the rate of 120 steps 
per minute. You do this without stiffness and without exag- 
gerating any of the movements. Swing your arms easily and 
in their natural arcs, 6 inches to the front and 3 inches to 
the rear of your body. 
■ 93. Double Time.—a. Being at the halt, or in inarch in 
quick time, to march in double time the commands are: 
1. DOUBLE TIME, 2. MARCH. 
(1) If you are at the halt and the command double time 
is given, shift your weight to your right leg without noticeable 
movement just as you did at the command forward. At the 
command march, step out and take up an easy running step 
in the cadence of double time (180 steps, 36 inches each, per 
minute). At the double time you raise your forearms to a 
horizontal position at your side, close your fingers, with 
knuckles out, and allow your arms to swing naturally. Re- 
member to keep your lower arms (forearms) horizontal along 
your waistline. 
(2) If you are already marching at quick time you con- 
tinue the march at the command double time. At the com- 
mand march you take one more step in the cadence of quick 
time and then step out at the double. You swing your arms 
the same as you did in (1) above. 
b. Being at the double time, to resume the cadence of quick 
time the commands are: 1. quick time, 2. MARCH. At the 
command march you take one step in double time and then 
commence marching in the cadence of quick time. Allow 
your arms to drop to your sides and then swing as they should 
in the cadence of quick time. 
■ 94. To Halt.—a. The halt may be executed as either foot 
strikes the ground. To halt when marching in quick time, 
the commands are: 1. squad, 2. HALT. At the command 
85 94-96 
soldier’s handbook 
halt, given as either foot strikes the ground, take one step 
in quick time and then place your rear foot alongside the 
leading foot and assume the position of attention. 
b. To halt when marching at the double time, the com- 
mands are: 1. squad, 2, HALT. At the command halt, take 
one step in double time, then one step in quick time and 
then place your rear foot alongside the leading foot and 
assume the position of attention. 
■ 95. To Mark Time.—Mark time may be given either while 
you are marching or while you are at a halt. Mark time may 
be executed either at quick time or at double time. The com- 
mands are: 1. mark time, 2. MARCH. 
a. If you are marching when the command march is given, 
you take one more step forward and then bring up your rear 
foot and plant it beside your leading foot with your heels on 
the same line. You then continue the cadence by alternately 
raising and planting each foot. You raise your feet 2 inches 
in marking time. The command march may be given as 
either foot is on the ground. 
b. If you are at a halt when the command march is given, 
you alternately raise and plant each foot beginning with your 
left just as you did in a, above. 
c. You execute the halt from mark time just as you did 
from quick time or from double time, except that a 2-inch 
vertical step is substituted for the 30-inch forward step. 
■ 96. Half Step.—a. The commands are: 1. half step, 2. 
MARCH. 
(1) If you are marching at quick time when the command 
march is given, you take one more 30-inch step, then begin 
taking 15-inch steps. The cadence does not change. 
(2) If you are marching at double time when the command 
march is given you take one more 36-inch step, then begin 
18-inch steps at the double time rate. 
h. FORWARD, HALF STEP, HALT, OR MARK TIME may each be 
executed one from the other either in quick or double time. 
c. If you are marching at the half step, the commands to 
take up the full step will be: 1. forward, 2. MARCH. 
d. If you are marking time, the same commands are given 
to take up the full step, that is: 1. forward, 2. MARCH. 
86 soldier’s handbook 
97-99 
■ 97. Side Step.—a. The commands to take up the side step 
are: 1. right (left) step, 2. MARCH. These commands are 
given only from the halt or while marking time. 
(1) 1. right step, 2. MARCH.—At the command march, 
you move the right foot 12 inches to the right and plant it. 
You then move the left foot and place it beside the right, 
left knee straight. You now continue in the cadence of quick 
time by starting again with the right foot. 
(2) 1. left step, 2. MARCH.—Left step is executed in the 
corresponding manner, starting with the left foot instead of 
the right. 
b. The side steps are used for short distances only. The 
side step is never executed in double time. 
c. To halt from the side step the commands are: 1. squad, 
2. HALT. The command halt is always given when the heels 
are together. At the command halt you take one more 12- 
inch step to the flank and then bring your feet together and 
halt. 
■ 98. Back Step.—The commands to take up the back step 
are: 1, backward, 2. MARCH. These commands are given 
only while at the halt or while marking time. 
a. At the command march you take a 15-inch step straight 
to the rear. 
b. The back step, like the side step, is used for short dis- 
tances only and is never executed at double time. 
■ 99. To Pace in Marching.—The facings in marching are an 
important part of movements such as column right, close, 
take interval, extend, etc. Facings in marching may be exe- 
cuted either from the halt or while marching. 
a. (1) Assume you are at a halt and are required to face 
to the right and commence marching in that direction. At 
the command of execution you turn to the right on the ball 
of your right foot and at the same time you step off with your 
left foot in the new direction. The length of this step will 
vary with the movement being executed. It may be a full 
step or a half step. It may be executed at either quick time 
or at double time. 
(2) Assume you are at the halt and are required to face 
to the left and commence marching in that direction. At 
87 99-100 
soldier’s handbook 
the command of execution you face to the left on the ball of 
the right foot and at the same time step off with your left 
foot in the new direction. 
b. (1) Assume you are now marching and are required to 
face to the right and continue marching in the new direction. 
The command of execution will be given as your right foot 
strikes the ground. At that command you advance and plant 
your left foot. You then face to the right in marching and 
at the same time step off in the new direction with your 
right foot. Again the length of this step will depend on 
whether you are marching at the half step, quick time, or 
double time. 
(2) Assume you are now marching and are required to 
face to the left and continue marching in the new direction. 
This time the command of execution will be given as your left 
foot strikes the ground. At the command you advance and 
plant your right foot. You then face to the left in marching 
and at the same time step off in the new direction with your 
left foot. 
c. To face to the rear while marching the commands are: 
1. to the rear, 2. MARCH. This command will be given as 
your right foot strikes the ground. At the command of exe- 
cution, advance and plant your left foot. You then turn to 
the right about on the balls of both feet and immediately 
step off in the new direction with your left foot. 
■ 100. To March by the Flank.—Being in march, the com- 
mands are: 1. by the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH, 
a. 1. by the right flank, 2. MARCH.—This command will 
be given as your right foot strikes the ground. At the com- 
mand march advance and plant your left foot and face to the 
right in marching. You then step off in the new direction 
with the right foot. 
b. 1. by the left flank, 2. MARCH.—This command will 
be given as your left foot strikes the ground. At the com- 
mand march advance and plant your right foot, face to the 
left in marching, and move off in the new direction with 
your left foot. 
88 soldier’s handbook 
101-102 
■ 101. To Change Step.—The commands are: 1. change step, 
2. MARCH. This command may be given as either foot 
strikes the ground. The command is used only while 
marching. 
a. If the command of execution (MARCH) is given as your 
right foot strikes the ground, you advance and plant your 
left foot. You then place the toe of your right foot near the 
heel of your left foot and immediately step off with your 
left foot. 
b. If the command of execution is given as your left foot 
strikes the ground, you change step on the right foot. 
■ 102. To March Other Than at Attention.—The commands 
are: 1. route step, 2. MARCH; or 1. at ease, 2. MARCH. 
a. 1. route step, 2. MARCH.—At the command march you 
are not required to march at attention, in cadence, or to 
maintain silence. 
b. 1. at ease, 2. MARCH.—At the command of execution 
you are not required to march at attention or in cadence. 
You are, however, required to maintain silence. 
273916°—41 4 
89 CHAPTER 8 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER WITH ARMS (DISMOUNTED) 
Section- I. General 103 
11. Manual of arms for the rifle 104-127 
111. Loadings and firings ; 128-133 
IV. Carrying the automatic rifle 134 
V. Manual of the pistol 135-151 
Paragraphs 
Section I 
■ 103. Rules Governing Carrying of Rifles.—Except where 
otherwise indicated, these rules will be applicable alike to the 
U. S. rifle, caliber .30, M 1903, and to the U. S. rifle, caliber 
.30, Ml. 
GENERAL 
a. (1) The U. S. rifle, caliber .30, M 1903, is not carried 
with cartridges in either the chamber or the magazine except 
when specifically ordered. When so loaded or when sup- 
posed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, 
with the safety lock turned to the “safe”. At all other times 
it is carried unlocked with the trigger pulled. The cut-off is 
kept turned off except when cartridges are actually used. 
(2) Whenever troops equipped with the U. S. rifle, caliber 
.30, M 1903, are formed under arms, pieces are immediately 
inspected at the commands: 1. inspection, 2. ARMS. A 
similar inspection is made before dismissal. If cartridges are 
found in the chamber or magazine they are removed and 
placed in the belt. 
h. (1) The U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml, is not carried with 
cartridges in either the chamber or the receiver except when 
specifically ordered. When so loaded or when supposed to 
be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, with the 
safety in its rearmost position, inside the trigger guard. 
(2) Whenever troops equipped with the U. S. rifle, caliber 
.30, Ml, are formed under arms, pieces are immediately in- 
spected at the commands: 1, inspection, 2, ARMS, 3. LOCK 
90 soldier’s handbook 
PIECES. At the command lock pieces, each man in ranks 
closes the bolt, sets the safety of his piece in its rearmost 
position, and resumes port arms. Rifles are again inspected 
at dismissal by the commands: 1, inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. 
UNLOCK PIECES, At the command unlock pieces, each 
man in ranks closes the bolt, sets the safety of his piece in 
its foremost position, pulls the trigger, and resumes port 
arms. If cartridges are found in the chamber or receiver, 
they are removed and placed in the belt. The procedure 
prescribed for these inspections is intended first, to insure 
that U. S. rifles, caliber .30, Ml, in the hands cf troops are 
carried cocked and locked; second, to insure that hammers 
are released on unloaded pieces not in use to prevent dam- 
age from long continued compression of the hammer 
springs. 
c. The bayonet is fixed only when so ordered. 
d. Fall in is executed with the rifle at the order arms. 
e. (1) Before starting any movement for troops armed 
with rifles, the commands, 1. right shoulder, 2. ARMS, are 
given before the command for movement. 
(2) Movements may be executed at the trail by prefacing 
the preparatory command with the words “at trail,” as 
1. at trail, forward, 2. MARCH. The trail is taken at the 
command march. 
(3) Weapons such as the automatic rifle, light machine 
gun, light mortar, etc., which have no manual of arms are 
slung from the right shoulder at the command of execution, 
ARMS, of 1. right shoulder, 2. ARMS. They are kept slung 
until the command rest or at ease. In long halts at atten- 
tion, the men carrying such equipment may be directed to 
“unsling arms.” 
/. When the facings, alinements, open and close ranks, 
side step, back step, forming for shelter tents, extending and 
closing are executed from the order, the weapon is brought 
to the trail while in motion and the order resumed on halt- 
ing. The position of trail arms is taken at the command 
of execution in each case. 
g. At the command halt, men armed with the rifle remain 
at the position of right (left) shoulder arms until the com- 
mand: 1. order, 2, ARMS, is given. 
91 103-104 
soldier’s handbook 
h. In double time under arms, a disengaged hand is held 
as when without arms. 
MANUAL OP ARMS FOR THE RIFLE 
Gecxxon n 
B 104. Rules Governing Execution of the Manual op 
Arms.—Except where otherwise indicated, these rules will be 
applicable alike to the U. S. rifle, caliber .30, M 1903, and to 
the U. S. rifle, caliber .30. Ml. 
a. In all positions of the left hand at the balance, the 
thumb clasps the rifle; the sling is included in the grasp of 
the hand (fig. 32). In describing the manual of arms, the 
term “at the balance” refers to points on rifles as follows: 
(1) U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml9o3.—The center of the rear 
sight leaf. 
(2) U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml.—A point just forward of 
the trigger housing. 
b. In all positions of the rifle, diagonally across the body, 
the barrel is up, butt in front of the right hip, barrel cross- 
ing opposite the junction of the neck with the left shoulder. 
The rifle is grasped at the balance with the left hand, palm 
toward the body, wrist straight. 
c. The cadence of the motions is that of quick time. Sol- 
diers are first required to give their whole attention to the 
details of the motions, the cadence being gradually acquired 
as they become accustomed to handling their rifles. The in- 
structor may require them to count aloud in cadence with the 
motions. 
d. (1) The manual is not executed in marching except to 
pass from right shoulder to left shoulder or port arms and 
the reverse in marching at attention. These movements may 
be used to add interest to the drill or to prevent fatigue in 
long marches at attention. 
(2) The manual is taught at a halt and the movements 
may, for the purpose of instruction, be divided into motions 
and executed in detail. In this case, the command of exe- 
cution determines the prompt execution of the first motion. 
92 SOLDIER'S HANDBOOK 
104-105 
and the commands two, three, four, that of the other 
motions. 
(3) To execute the movement in detail, the instructor first 
cautions, “By the numbers.” All movements divided into 
motions are then executed as above explained until he cau- 
tions, “Without the numbers.” 
e. (1) Any appropriate position of the manual of arms may 
be ordered from a previous position by giving the suitable 
commands. 
Figure 32.—Left hand at the balance. 
(2) Under exceptional conditions of weather and fatigue, 
the rifle may be carried as directed. 
■ 105. Position of Order Arms.—The butt of the rifle rests 
on the ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on line with 
the toe of, and touching the right shoe, right hand holding 
the rifle between the thumb and fingers, left hand as in posi- 
tion of the soldier without arms. 
93 SOLDIER'S handbook 
Figure 33.—Position of order arms. 
Figure 34.—Position of trail arms. soldier’s handbook 
106-110 
■ 106. Being at Order Arms.—l. trail, 2. ARMS. At the 
command arms, raise the rifle and incline the muzzle for- 
ward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 15° with 
the vertical, the right arm slightly bent. 
■ 107. Being at Trail Arms.—l. order, 2. ARMS. At the 
command arms, lower the rifle with the right hand and 
resume the order. 
B 108. Being at Order Arms to Sling Arms, and Being at 
Sling Arms to Unsling Arms.—a. sling arms. This move- 
ment is not executed in cadence and applies to any rifle, 
automatic rifle, light machine gun, light mortar, etc. Loosen 
the sling, if not already loosened, and in the most convenient 
manner assume the position shown in figure 35. This posi- 
tion is authorized for long parades, long reviews, and for 
occasions when the prolonged holding of the rifle becomes 
a hardship on the troops. When used in ceremonies the 
bayonet may be fixed. 
b. 1. unsling, 2. ARMS, 3. adjust, 4. SLINGS. At the 
command arms, pieces are unslung. At the command slings, 
slings are adjusted to the drill position. This adjustment of 
the sling will be made before precise movements of the 
manual are to be executed. 
□ 109. Being at Order Arms,—l. port, 2. ARMS. At the 
command arms, raise the rifle with the right hand and carry 
it diagonally across the front of the body until the right 
hand is in front of and slightly to the left of the chin (fig. 
36®), so that the barrel is up, butt in front of the right hip, 
barrel crossing opposite the junction of the neck with the 
left shoulder. At the same time, grasp the rifle at the 
balance with the left hand, palm toward the body, wrist 
straight. (TWO) Carry the right hand to the small of the 
stock, grasping it, palm down, holding right forearm hori- 
zontal (fig. 36®). 
B 110. Being at Order Arms.—1. present, 2. ARMS. At the 
command arms, with the right hand carry the rifle in front 
of the center of the body, barrel to the rear and vertical, 
grasp it with the left hand at the balance, forearm hori- 
zontal and resting against the body. (TWO) Grasp the 
small of the stock with the right hand. 
95 111-112 
SOLDIER’S handbook 
■ 111. Being at Present or Port Arms.—l. order, 2. ARMS. 
At the command arms, let go of the rifle with the right hand 
and regrasp the piece between the upper sling swivel and 
stacking swivel. (TWO) Let go of the rifle with the left 
hand, lower the piece to the right so that the butt is 3 inches 
from the ground, barrel to the rear, left hand with the 
Figure 35.—Position of sling arms, 
fingers extended and joined steadying the rifle, forearm and 
wrist straight and inclining downward. (THREE) Complete 
the order by lowering the rifle gently to the ground with the 
right hand. Cut away the left hand smartly to the side. 
Allowing the rifle to drop to the ground forcibly injures the 
rifle and is prohibited. 
■ 112. Being at Order Arms.—a. U. S. rifle, caliber .30, 
M 1903.—1. Inspection, 2. ARMS. At the command arms, 
96 soldier's handbook 
take the position of port arms. Seize the bolt handle with 
the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn the handle 
up, draw the bolt back, lower the head and eyes sufficiently 
to glance into the magazine. Having found the magazine 
empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes to the 
front. 
b. U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml.—l. inspection, 2. ARMS. At 
the command arms, take the position of port arms. With the 
©First position. 
Figure 36.—Position of port arms 
© Second position. 
fingers of the left hand closed, place the left thumb on the 
operating rod handle and push it smartly to the rear until 
it is caught by the operating rod catch; at the same time 
lower the head and eyes sufficiently to glance into the re- 
ceiver. Having found the receiver empty, or having emptied 
it, raise the head and eyes to the front; at the same time 
regrasp the piece with the left hand at the balance. 
97 SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
Figure 37.—Execution of present arms. 
Figure 38.—Next to last position of order arms. 
98 SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
113-114 
□ 113. Being at Inspection Arms.—a. U. S. rifle, caliber .30, 
M 1903. 1. ORDER (RIGHT SHOULDER, PORT), 2. ARMS. At the 
preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle 
down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the com- 
mand arms, complete the movement ordered. 
b. U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml.—l. lock pieces, 2. order 
(RIGHT SHOULDER), 3. ARMS, or 1. UNLOCK PIECES, 2. DIS- 
MISSED. At the command lock (or unlock) pieces, place 
the right side cf the right hand against the operating rod 
handle with the fingers extended and joined and the thumb 
cn the follower. (TWO) Force the operating red handle 
slightly to the rear, depress the follower with the right thumb, 
and permit the bolt to ride forward about 1 inch over the 
follower. (THREE) Remove the thumb frem the follower 
and release the operating rod handle. (FOUR) Lock the 
piece, or unlock the piece and pull the trigger as the case may 
be (par. 103b(2)) and resume the position of port arms. 
After the pieces have been locked cr unlocked, as prescribed 
above, order or right shoulder arms is given or the unit is 
dismissed. 
■ 114. Being at Order Arms.—l. right shoulder, 2. ARMS. 
At the command arms, raise and carry the rifle diagonally 
across the body with the right hand as shown in figure 39, at 
the same time grasp it at the balance with the left hand. 
(TWO) Regrasp it with the right hand on the butt, the heel 
between the first two fingers, thumb and fingers closed on 
the stock. (THREE) Without changing the grasp of the 
right hand, place the rifle on the right shoulder, barrel up 
and inclined at an angle of about 45° from the horizontal, 
trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow against 
the side, forearm horizontal, the rifle in a vertical plane per- 
pendicular to the front; carry the left hand, thumb and fin- 
gers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, first joint 
of the forefinger touching the cocking piece (or, for the Ml 
rifle, touching the rear end of the receiver), wrist straight, and 
elbow down. (FOUR) Cut away the left hand smartly to the 
side. 
99 115-117 
SOLDIER’S handbook 
■ 115. Being at Right Shoulder Arms.—l. port, 2. ARMS. 
At the command arms, press the butt down quickly and 
throw the rifle diagonally across the body, at the same time 
turning it to the left so as to bring the barrel up, the right 
hand retaining its grasp on the butt, the left grasping the 
rifle at the balance. (TWO) Change the right hand to the 
small of the stock. 
Figure 39.—Execution of right shoulder arms, 
■ 116. Being at Right Shoulder Arms.—l. order, 2, ARMS. 
At the command arms, press the butt down quickly and 
throw the rifle diagonally across the body, the right hand 
retaining the grasp on the butt, the left hand grasping the 
rifle at the balance. Then execute order arms as described 
in paragraph 111. 
■ 117. Being at Port Arms.—1. right shoulder, 2. ARMS. 
At the command arms, change the right hand to the butt as 
described in paragraph 114. (TWO), (THREE) Execute the 
100 SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
117-122 
last two movements as in right shoulder arms from order 
arms. 
■ 118. Being at Order Arms.—l. parade, 2. REST. At the 
command rest, move the left foot smartly 12 inches to the 
left of the right foot, keeping the legs straight, so that the 
weight of the body rests equally on both feet. At the same 
time incline the muzzle of the rifle to the front, the right arm 
extended, right hand grasping the rifle just below the upper 
band. Hold the left hand behind the body, resting in the 
small of the back, palm to the rear. 
■ 119. Being at Parade Rest.—l, squad, 2. ATTENTION. At 
the command attention, resume the position of order arms. 
■ 120. Being at Right Shoulder Arms.—l. left shoulder, 2. 
ARMS. At the command arms, execute port arms in two 
counts as described in paragraph 115. (THREE) Let go of 
the rifle with the left hand and with the right hand still 
grasping the small cf the stock place it on the left shoulder, 
barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow cf the shoulder; at 
the same time grasp the butt with the left hand; heel be- 
tween the first and second fingers, thumb and fingers closed 
on the stock, left forearm horizontal, left elbow against the 
side, the rifle in a vertical plane perpendicular to the front. 
(FOUR) Drop the right hand quickly to the right side. 
■ 121. Being at Left Shoulder Arms.—a. 1. port, 2. ARMS. 
At the command arms, grasp the rifle with the right hand at 
the small of the stock. (TWO) Let go with the left hand 
and at the same time carry the piece with the right hand 
to the position of port arms and then regrasp it with the 
left. 
b. Left shoulder arms may be ordered directly from the 
order right shoulder, or present. At the command arms, 
execute port arms and continue in cadence to the position 
ordered. 
■ 122. Being at Left Shoulder Arms.—l. right shoulder, 2. 
ARMS. At the command arms, execute port arms as de- 
scribed in paragraph 121, and then right shoulder arms as 
described in paragraph 117. 
101 123-125 
SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
B 123. Being at Left Shoulder Arms.—l. order, 2. ARMS. 
At the command arms, execute port arms as described in 
paragraph 121 and complete the movement of order arms as 
described in paragraph 111. 
■ 124. Being at Order or Trail Arms.—l. rifle, 2. SALUTE. 
At the command salute, carry the left hand smartly to the 
right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers ex- 
tended and joined, forearm and wrist straight, first joint of 
forefinger between the stacking swivel and the muzzle as the 
Figure 40.—Position, of parade rest. 
conformation of the man permits, and look toward the per- 
son saluted. (TWO) Cut away the left hand smartly to the 
side; turn the head and eyes to the front. 
■ 125. Being at Right Shoulder Arms.—l. rifle, 2. SALUTE. 
At the command salute, carry the left hand smartly to small 
of the stock, forearm horizontal, palm of the hand down, 
thumb and fingers extended and joined, first joint of the 
forefinger touching end of cocking piece (or, for the Ml 
102 SOLDIER’S handbook 
125-126 
rifle, touching the rear end of the receiver); look toward the 
person saluted. (TWO) Cut away the left hand smartly to 
the side; turn the head and eyes to the front. 
□ 126. Being at Order Arms.—l. fix, 2. BAYONETS. At 
the command bayonets— 
a. If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt, move 
the muzzle of the rifle to the left front and grasp the rifle 
below the stacking swivel with the left hand; grasp the 
bayonet with the right hand, back of the hand toward the 
Figure 41.—Rifle salute at right shoulder arms and at order arms. 
body; pressing the spring with the forefinger, draw the 
bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, glancing 
at the muzzle; resume the order. 
b. If the bayonet is carried on the haversack, draw and 
fix the bayonet in the most com anient manner. 
c. These movements are not executed in cadence. 
103 soldier’s handbook 
■ 127. Being at Order Arms.—l. unfix, 2. BAYONETS. 
At the command bayonets— 
a. If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt, take 
the position for fixing bayonets; grasp the handle of the 
bayonet with the right hand, pressing the spring, raise the 
bayonet until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle 
of the rifle; drop the point to the left, back of the hand 
toward the body and, glancing at the scabbard, return the 
bayonet, the blade passing between the left arm and the 
Figure 42.—T0 fix bayonets. 
body; regrasp the rifle with the right hand and resume the 
order. 
h. If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack, 
take the bayonet from the rifle as described above and re- 
turn it to the scabbard in the most convenient manner, 
c. These movements are not executed in cadence. 
104 soldier’s handbook 
128-129 
Section 111 
LOADINGS AND FIRINGS 
■ 128. General Rules.—Except where otherwise indicated, 
these rules will be applicable alike to the U. S, rifle, caliber 
,30, M 1903, and the U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml. 
a. For ceremonial firing, the front rank only of units 
larger than a squad executes the loading and firing. A squad 
is always formed in line preliminary to such firing. 
b. Rifles, caliber .30, M 1903, are loaded and locked before 
any orders for firing are given. Rifles, caliber .30, Ml, are 
loaded while locked. (See par. 1035(2).) 
c. Except during firing, if rifles have been ordered loaded 
and locked, they are kept loaded and locked without com- 
mand until the command unload, or 1. inspection, 2. ARMS. 
During firing, fresh clips will be inserted when the maga- 
zine or clip is exhausted. 
d. Except when used as a single loader, the U. S. rifle, 
caliber .30, Ml, is habitually loaded by placing a full clip of 
eight cartridges in the receiver. 
■ 129. To Load.—a. The unit being in any formation, stand- 
ing at a halt, the commands are: 1. with ball (blank, 
DUMMY, GUARD) CARTRIDGES, 2. LOAD. 
(1) U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml9o3.—At the command load, 
each front rank rifleman faces half right and carries the 
tight foot 12 inches to the right and to such position as will 
insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the body; 
raises or lowers the rifle and drops it into the left hand at 
the balance, left thumb extending along the stock, muzzle 
pointed into the air at an angle of 45°, and turns the cut- 
off up. With the right hand he turns up the bolt and draws 
it back; takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip 
slots; places his thumb on the powder space of the top 
cartridge, the fingers extending around the rifle and tips 
resting on the magazine floor plate; forces the cartridges 
105 SOLDIER’S handbook 
into the magazine by pressing down with the thumb; re- 
moves the clip; thrusts the bolt home, turning down the 
handle; turns the safety lock to the “safe” and carries the 
hand to the small of the stock. Automatic riflemen do not 
execute the ceremonial loadings or firings. 
(2) U. S. rifle, caliber .20, Ml.—At the command load, 
each front rank rifleman faces half right and carries his 
right foot 12 inches to the right and to such position as 
will secure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the body, 
raises or lowers the rifle and drops it into the left hand at 
the balance, right hand at the small of the stock, muzzle in 
the air at an angle of 45°. With the forefinger of the right 
hand, he pulls the operating rod handle smartly to the rear 
until the operating rod is caught by the operating rod catch. 
With his right hand he takes a fully loaded clip and places 
it on top of the follower. He places the right side of his 
right hand against the operating rod handle and with his 
thumb presses the clip down into the receiver until it en- 
gages the clip latch. He swings his thumb to the right so as 
to clear the bolt in its forward movement. He releases the 
operating rod handle. He then pushes forward on the 
operating rod handle with the heel of his right hand to 
make certain of complete closing of the bolt and carries 
his right hand to the small of the stock. Automatic rifle- 
men do not execute the ceremonial loadings and firings. 
b. For instruction in loading, the commands are; 1. simu- 
late, 2. LOAD. 
(1) U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml 903.—At the command load, 
execute loading as described in a (1) above, except that the 
cut-off remains “off” and the handling of the cartridge is 
simulated. 
(2) U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml.—At the command load, 
execute loading as described in a (2) above except that the 
handling of cartridges is simulated. 
c. (1) The U. S. rifle, caliber .30, M 1903, may be used as 
a single loader by turning the cut-off to “off”. At the com- 
mand load, the magazine may be filled in whole or in part 
by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are 
in the proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader 
is, however, to be regarded as exceptional. 
106 SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
129-130 
(2) To use the U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml, as a single 
loader, at the command load, take the position of load and 
open the bolt. With the right hand, place one round in 
the chamber, seating it in place with the thumb. With the 
side of the right hand against the operating rod handle 
and the fingers extended and joined, force the operating rod 
handle slightly to the rear, depress the follower with the 
right thumb, and permit the bolt to ride forward about 1 
inch over the follower. Then remove the thumb from the 
follower, release the operating rod handle, and push forward 
on the operating rod handle with the heel of the hand to be 
certain that the bolt is completely closed. Carry the right 
hand to the small of the stock. 
O 130. To Unload.—Being in any formation, the command 
is: UNLOAD. 
a. U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml9o3.—At the command unload, 
take the position of load, turn the safety lock up, and move 
the bolt alternately backward and forward until all the 
cartridges are ejected. After the last cartridge is ejected, 
the chamber is closed by first thrusting the bolt forward 
slightly to free it from the stud holding it in place when the 
chamber is opened, pressing the follower down and back 
to engage it under the bolt, and then thrusting the bolt home. 
The trigger is then pulled, the cartridges are picked up, 
cleaned, and returned to the belt, and the rifle is brought to 
the order. 
b. U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml.—At the command unload, 
take the position of load. Hook the right thumb over the 
operating rod handle, pull and hold the operating rod in 
the extreme rear position. Hold the rifle with the right hand, 
thumb on operating rod handle, fingers around trigger guard. 
Steady the rifle by pressing the stock against the right hip. 
Place the left hand over the receiver and release the clip 
latch with the left thumb. Catch the ejected clip in the 
left hand, return the clip to the belt, return the left hand 
to the balance. Place the right side of the right hand against 
the operating rod handle and force the operating rod slightly 
to the rear. Depress the follower with the right thumb and 
permit the bolt to ride forward about 1 inch over the fol- 
107 soldier’s handbook 
©To execute position of load. 
Figure 43.—The platoon in ceremonial firing. 
108 soldier's handbook 
©To execute position, of fire. 
Figure 43 .-—The platoon in ceremonial firing'—Continued. 
109 130-132 
SOLDIER'S HANDBOOK 
lower. Remove the thumb from the follower and release the 
operating rod handle. Bring the rifle to the order. 
■ 131. To Fire the Rifle.—a. U. S. rifle, caliber .30, M 1903, 
fully loaded with ball (blank or guard) ammunition.—Squeeze 
the trigger for each shot. After each shot draw back and 
thrust home the bolt with the right hand, leaving the safety 
lock turned up to the “ready.” 
b. U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml.—(1) Fully loaded with clips 
of ball ammunition.—Squeeze the trigger for each shot. 
When the eighth shot has been fired, the clip will be ejected 
automatically and the bolt will remain open for the insertion 
of a new clip. 
(2) Fully loaded with clips of blank or guard ammuni~ 
tion.—Squeeze the trigger for each shot. After each shot, 
pull the operating rod handle to the rear with the right fore- 
finger and release it. Push forward on the operating rod 
handle with the heel of the right hand to insure that the bolt 
is fully closed. 
O 132. To Fire by Volley.—a. Being in firing formation with 
rifles loaded, the commands are: 1. front rank, 2. ready, 3. 
AIM, 4. squad, 5. FIRE. (For ceremonial purposes, blank 
ammunition is used and only the front rank executes the 
commands.) 
(1) U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml9o2.—At the command ready, 
take the position of load, if not already in that position, and 
turn the safety lock to the “ready.” At the command aim, 
raise the rifle with both hands, butt placed and held firmly 
against the shoulder, left hand well under the rifle grasping 
it at or in front of the balance, rifle resting in the palm 
of the left hand, right elbow at the height of the shoulder, 
right cheek held firmly against the stock as far forward as 
it can be placed without straining. The rifle is raised 45° 
from the horizontal or, if ordered, at the horizontal. The left 
eye is closed, right eye looking through the notch of the rear 
sight. At the command fire, the trigger is squeezed rapidly; 
the rifle is then lowered to the position of load and loaded. 
(2) U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml.—At the command ready, 
take the position of load, if not already in that position. At 
the command aim, raise the rifle with both hands, butt placed 
110 soldier’s handbook 
and held firmly against the shoulder, left hand well under 
the rifle grasping it at or in front of the balance, rifle resting 
in the palm of the left hand, right elbow at the height of the 
shoulder, right cheek held firmly against the stock as far 
forward as it can be placed without straining, and press the 
safety lock to its forward position with the trigger finger. 
The rifle is raised 45° from the horizontal or, if ordered, at 
the horizontal. The left eye is closed, right eye looking over 
the rear sight. At the command fire, the trigger is squeezed 
rapidly; the rifle is then lowered to the position cf load and 
loaded. 
b. To continue the firing, the commands are: 1. aim, 2. 
SQUAD. 3. FIRE. 
(1) U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml9o3.—Each command is exe- 
cuted as previously explained, load (from the magazine) is 
executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with 
the right hand, leaving the safety lock turned up to the 
“ready”. 
(2) U. S. rifle, caliber .30, Ml.—Each command is executed 
as previously explained, load (from the clip) is executed by 
pulling the operating rod handle fully to the rear with the 
right forefinger and releasing it, leaving the “safety” in its 
forward position. 
□ 133. To Cease Firing.—The command is; CEASE FIRING. 
At the command cease firing, firing stops; rifles not already 
at the position of load are brought to that position. 
CARRYING THE AUTOMATIC RIFLE 
Section IV 
■ 134. General Rules.—a. Except as otherwise prescribed, 
the automatic rifle is habitually carried slung over the right 
shoulder, butt down, barrel to the rear, right hand grasping 
the sling, hand in front of armpit. 
b. For marches and field exercises, the automatic rifle may 
be carried slung over either shoulder. 
c. When troops are at ease, the automatic rifle is kept 
slung unless otherwise ordered. 
d. When troops are at rest, the automatic rifle may be un- 
slung and the position of order arms taken. soldier’s handbook 
e. Only the following movements of the manual are exe- 
cuted by the automatic rifleman: 
(1) Parade rest.—lf at sling arms, execute as without 
arms keeping the right hand on the sling. 
(2) Inspection arms.—At the command of execution, 
grasp the magazine with the left hand; at the same time 
press the magazine release with the right hand. Withdraw 
the magazine with the left hand and place it in the belt. 
Pull back the operating handle with the left hand. 
Figure 44.—Position of automatic rifle slung over right shoulder, 
(3) Being at inspection, arms.—l. order (port, right 
shoulder), 2. ARMS. At the command of execution, pull 
the trigger, replace the magazine, and resume the position 
of attention, the automatic rifle being kept slung. 
/. Men armed with the automatic rifle salute with the 
hand salute when not in ranks. In ranks they do not salute. 
g. For instruction, ceremonies, and drill, the organization 
commander may, at his discretion, substitute rifles for auto- 
matic rifles. 
112 soldier's handbook 
135-136 
Section V 
MANUAL OF THE PISTOL 
■ 135. General.—a. The movements herein described differ 
in purpose from the manual of arms for the rifle in that they 
are not designed to be executed in exact unison. Further- 
more, with only a few exceptions, there is no real necessity 
for their simultaneous execution. They are not therefore 
planned as a disciplinary drill to be executed in cadence with 
snap and precision, but merely as simple, quick, and safe 
methods of handling the pistol. Commands are prescribed 
for such movements only as may be occasionally executed 
simultaneously by the squad or larger unit. 
b. In general movements begin and end at the position of 
RAISE PISTOL. 
c. Commands for firing, when required, are limited to 
COMMENCE FIRING and CEASE FIRING. 
d. Officers and enlisted men armed with the pistol remain 
at the position of attention during the manual of arms, except 
when their units are presented to their commanders or are 
presented during ceremonies, at retreat, and at guard mount- 
ing. In such cases they execute the hand salute at the com- 
mand of execution, ARMS, of 1, present, 2. ARMS, and re- 
sume the position of attention at the command cf execution 
of the next command. 
e. Whenever the pistol is carried mounted the lanyard will 
he used. The lanyard should be of such length that the arm 
may be fully extended without constraint. 
■ 136. To Raise Pistol.—The commands are; 1. raise, 2. PIS- 
TOL. At the command pistol, unbutton the flap of the 
holster with the right hand and grasp the stock, back of the 
hand outward. Draw the pistol from the holster; reverse it, 
muzzle up, the thumb and last three fingers holding the stock, 
the forefinger extended outside the trigger guard, the barrel 
of the pistol to the rear and inclined to the front at an angle 
of 30°, the hand as high as, and 6 inches in front of, the 
Dismounted 
113 136-142 
SOLDIER’S handbook 
point cf the right shoulder. This is the position of raise 
PISTOL. 
■ 137. To Withdraw the Magazine.—Without lowering the 
right hand, turn the barrel slightly to the right; press the 
magazine catch with the right thumb and with the left hand 
remove the magazine. Place it in the belt or pocket. 
■ 138. To Open the Chamber.—Withdraw the magazine and 
resume the position of raise pistol. Without lowering the 
right hand, grasp the slide with the thumb and the first two 
fingers of the left hand (thumb on left side of slide and 
pointing downward); keeping the muzzle elevated, shift the 
grip of the right hand so that the right thumb engages with 
the slide stop. Push the slide downward to its full extent and 
force the slide stop into its notch with the right thumb with- 
out lowering the muzzle of the pistol. 
■ 139. To Close the Chamber.—With the right thumb press 
down the slide stop and let the slide go forward. Squeeze 
the trigger. 
■ 140. To Insert a Magazine.—Without lowering the right 
hand, turn the barrel to the right. Grasp a magazine with 
the first two fingers and thumb of the left hand; withdraw 
it from the belt and insert it in the pistol. Press it fully 
home. 
«> 
■ 141. To Load Pistol.—The commands are: 1. load, 2. PIS- 
TOL, At the command pistol, if a loaded magazine is not 
already in the pistol, insert one. Without lowering the right 
hand, turn the barrel slightly to the left. Grasp the slide 
with the thump and fingers of the left hand (thumb on right 
side of slide and pointing upward). Pull the slide downward 
to its full extent. Release the slide and engage the safety 
lock. 
■ 142. To Unload Pistol.—The commands are: 1. unload, 2. 
PISTOL. At the command pistol, withdraw the magazine. 
Open the chamber as prescribed in paragraph 141. Glance 
at the chamber to verify that it is empty. Close the cham- 
ber. Take the position of raise pistol and squeeze the trig- 
ger. Then insert an empty magazine. 
114 soldier's handbook 
143-144 
■ 143. To Inspect Pistol.—The commands are: 1. inspec- 
tion, 2. PISTOL. At the command pistol, withdraw the 
magazine. Open the chamber as prescribed in paragraph 
138. Take the position of raise pistol. The withdrawn 
magazine is held in the open left hand at the height of the 
belt. After the pistol has been inspected, or at the com- 
mand 1, return, 2. PISTOL, close the chamber, take the 
position of raise pistol, and squeeze the trigger. Insert an 
empty magazine and execute return pistol. 
© To raise tho 
pistol. 
© To withdraw 
the magazine. 
® To pull the 
elide downward in 
loadmg. 
Fxgtjue 43.—Manual of the pistol (dismounted). 
□ 144. To Return Pistol.—The commands are: 1. return, 2. 
PISTOL. At the command pistol, lower the pistol to the 
holster, reversing it, muzzle down, back of the hand to the 
right; raise the flap of the holster with the right thumb; 
insert the pistol in the holster and thrust it home; button 
the flap of the holster with the right hand. 
115 145-146 
SOLDIER'S HANDBOOK 
Mounted 
■ 145. General Rules.—The following movements are exe- 
cuted as when dismounted; raise pistol, return pistol, close 
chamber. The mounted movements may be practiced when 
dismounted by first cautioning, “Mounted position.” The 
right foot is then carried 20 inches to the right and the left 
hand to the position of the bridle hand. Whenever the 
pistol is lowered into the bridle hand, the movement is exe- 
cuted by rotating the barrel to the right. Grasp the slide 
@ To open the chamber. 
Figure 45.—Manual of the pistol (dismounted). 
© To inspect the pistol. 
in the full grip of the left hand, thumb extending along the 
slide, back, of the hand down, barrel down and pointing 
upward and to the left front. 
■ 146, To Withdraw the Magazine.—Lower the pistol into 
the bridle hand. Press the magazine catch with the fore- 
finger of the right hand, palm of the hand over the base of 
the magazine to prevent it from springing out; withdraw the 
magazine and place it in the belt or pocket. 
116 soldier’s handbook 
147-151 
■ 147. To Open the Chamber.—Withdraw the magazine. 
Grasp the stock with the right hand, back of the hand down, 
thrust forward and upward with the right hand, and engage 
the slide stop by pressure of the right thumb. 
■ 148. To Insert a Magazine.—Lower the pistol into the 
bridle hand. Extra magazines should be carried in the belt 
with the projection on the base pointing to the left. Grasp 
the magazine with the tip of the right forefinger on the pro- 
jection, withdraw it from the belt, and insert it in the pistol. 
Press it fully home. 
■ 149. To Load Pistol.—The commands are: 1. load, 2. PIS- 
TOL. At the command pistol, lower the pistol into the 
bridle hand. If a loaded magazine is not already in the pis- 
tol, insert one. Grasp the stock with the right hand, back 
of the hand down, and thrust upward and to the left front; 
release the slide and engage the safety lock. 
■ 150. To Unload Pistol.—The commands are: 1. unload, 2. 
PISTOL. At the command pistol, withdraw the magazine. 
Open the chamber. Glance at the chamber to verify that it 
is empty. Close the chamber. Take the position of raise 
pistol and squeeze the trigger. Then insert an empty maga- 
zine. 
■ 151. To Inspect Pistol.—The commands are: 1. inspec- 
tion, 2. PISTOL. (The pistol is inspected mounted only at 
mounted guard mounting. The magazine is not withdrawn.) 
At the command pistol, take the position of raise pistol. 
After the pistol has been inspected, or on command, it is 
returned. 
117 CHAPTER 9 
SQUAD AND PLATOON DRILL 
Paragraphs 
Section I. The cquad 152-168 
11. The platoon 169—184 
Suction I 
THE SQUAD 
® 152. General.—a. The squad is a group of soldiers organized 
primarily as a combat team. It consists of one squad leader 
and other personnel as authorized by appropriate Tables of 
Organization. When the squad leader is absent, he is re- 
placed by the second in command. If the second in command 
is also absent, the next senior member of the squad acts as 
leader. 
b. As far as practicable, the squad is kept intact. The nor- 
mal formation of the squad is a single rank or single file. 
This permits variation in the number of men composing the 
squad. 
c. The squad in line marches to the left cr to the front only 
for minor changes of position. 
■ 153. To Form the Squad.—a. The command is: FALL IN. 
At the command fall in, the squad forms in line as shown 
in figure 48. On falling in, each man except the one on the 
left extends his left arm laterally at shoulder height, palm 
of the hand down, fingers extended and joined. Each man, 
except the one on the right, turns his head and eyes to the 
right and places himself in line so that his right shoulder 
touches lightly the tips of the fingers of the man on his 
right. As soon as proper intervals have been obtained, each 
man drops his arm smartly to his side and turns his head to 
the front. 
b. To form at close intervals, the commands are: 1. at 
close intervals, 2. FALL IN. At the command fall in, the 
men fall in as in a above, except that close intervals are ob- 
tained by placing the left hands on the hips as shown in fig- 
118 soldier’s handbook 
INTERVALS BETWEEN MEN: "NORMAL" ARM S LENGTH 
SQUAD IN LINE 
"CLOSE" 4 INCHES 
SQUAD IN COLUMN 
DISTANCE BETWEEN MEN 40 INCHES 
SQUAD LEADER 
SECOND IN COMMAND 
Figur3 46.—The squad. SOLDIER’S handbook 
RIFLE 
SQUAD 
RIFLE SQUAD 
WITH 
AUTOMATIC 
RIFLE 
LIGHT 
MACHINE 
GUN 
SQUAD 
60 MM 
MORTAR 
SQUAD 
"I SQUAD 
J LEADER 
“1 SQUAD 
J LEADER 
SQUAD 
LEADER 
MORTAR 
GUNNER 
J SCOUT 
SCOUT 
] LIGHT M. 
GUNNER 
1 ASSISTANT 
GUNNER 
SCOUT 
SCOUT 
ASSISTANT 
GUNNER 
AMMUNITION! 
CARRIER 
RIFLEMAN 
] AUTOMATIC 
RIFLEMAN 
I AMMUNITION 
CARRIER 
1 AMMUNITION 
J CARRIER 
RIFLEMAN 
RIFLEMAN 
] LIGHT M. 
GUNNER 
| AMMUNITION 
1 CARRIER 
RIFLEMAN 
1 RIFLEMAN 
1 ASSISTANT 
GUNNER 
: RIFLEMAN 
I RIFLEMAN 
~] AMMUNITION 
J CARRIER 
] RIFLEMAN 
RIFLEMAN 
RIFLEMAN 
1 RIFLEMAN 
1 RIFLEMAN 
RIFLEMAN 
]2ND IN 
COMMAND 
12ND IN 
TOMUAKin 
Figure 47.—Details of infantry rifle company squads. 
120 soldier's handbook 
153-154 
ure 49. In this position the heel of the palm of the hand 
rests on the hip, the fingers and thumb are extended and 
joined, and the elbow is in the plane of the body. 
c. The squad falls in on the right file if the squad leader is 
not in ranks. If the squad is formed under arms, pieces are 
at once inspected. 
■ 154. Previous Instructions Applicable.—The squad ex- 
ecutes the positions, movements, and manual of arms as pre- 
scribed in chapters 7 and 8, all men executing the movements 
simultaneously. 
Figure 48.—FALL IN. 
273916°—41 5 
121 soldier’s handbook 
Figure 49.—1. at close interval, 2. FALL IN. 
122 soldier’s handbook 
155-159 
■ 155. To Dismiss the Squad.—The commands are: 1. in- 
spection, 2. ARMS, 3. port, 4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED, or 3. 
UNLOCK PIECES, 4. DISMISSED (if armed with the Ml 
rifle). 
■ 156. To Count Off.—a. The command is: COUNT OFF. 
At the command count off, each man of the squad, except 
the one on the right flank, turns his head and eyes to the 
right. The right flank man calls out “One”. Each man in 
succession calls out, “Two”, “Three”, etc., turning his head 
and eyes to the front as he gives his number. 
b. This command may be given whenever it is desired that 
the men know their relative position in the squad. 
■ 157. To Aline the Squad.—a. If in line, the commands 
are: 1. dress right (left), 2. DRESS, 3. ready, 4. FRONT. 
At the command dress, each man except the one on the left 
extends his left arm (or if at close interval, places his left 
hand upon his hip), and all aline themselves to the right. 
The instructor places himself on the right flank one pace 
from and in prolongation of the line and facing down the 
line. From this position he verifies the alinement of the 
men, ordering individual men to move forward or back as is 
necessary. Having checked the alinement, he faces to the 
right in marching and moves three paces forward, halts, 
faces to the left and commands: 1. ready, 2. FRONT. At 
the command front, arms are dropped quietly and smartly 
to the side and heads turned to the front. 
b. If in column the command is: COVER. At the com- 
mand cover, men cover from front to rear with 40 inches 
distance between men. 
■ 158. Being in Line at Normal Interval, to Obtain Close 
Interval.—The commands are: 1. close, 2. MARCH. At the 
command march, all men except the right flank man face to 
the right in marching and form at close interval, as pre- 
scribed in paragraph 153 b. 
■ 159. Being in Line at Close Interval, to Extend to 
Normal Interval.—The commands are: 1. extend, 2. 
MARCH. At the command march, all men except the right 
flank man face to the left in marching and form at normal 
interval as prescribed in paragraph 153 a. 
123 160-162 
soldier's handbook 
■ 160. Being in Line, to March to the Flank.—The com- 
mands are: 1. right (left), 2. FACE, 3. forward, 4. MARCH. 
The movements are executed as explained in paragraphs 
89 a and 92, all men stepping off simultaneously. 
■ 161. To March to the Oblique.—a. For the instruction of 
recruits, the squad being in column or correctly alined, the 
instructor causes each man to face half right (left), points 
out his position, and explains that it is to be maintained in 
the oblique march. 
b. The squad being in any formation, the commands are; 
1. right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH. At the command 
march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, each in- 
dividual advances and plants the left foot, faces half right 
in marching and steps off in a direction of 45° to the right 
of his original front. He preserves his relative position, 
keeping his shoulders parallel to those of the guide (man on 
right front of line or column), and so regulates his step 
that the ranks remain parallel to their original front. 
c. The command halt is given on the left foot when halt- 
ing from the right oblique and on the right foot when halt- 
ing from left oblique. At the command halt, given as the 
left foot strikes the ground, each individual advances and 
plants the right foot, turns to the front on the ball of the 
right foot, and places the left foot by the side of the right 
foot. 
d. To resume the original direction, the commands are: 1. 
forward, 2. MARCH. At the command march, each indi- 
vidual faces half left in marching and then moves straight 
to the front. 
e. If at half step or mark time while obliquing, the full 
step is resumed by the command: 1. oblique, 2. MARCH. 
f. To give volume to the command the word “oblique” is 
pronounced to rhyme with “strike.” 
a 162. To March Toward a Plank While in March.—a. The 
commands are: 1. by the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH. At 
the command march, each individual executes the movement 
as prescribed in paragraph 100. 
b. This movement is used when a quick movement to the 
right or left for a short distance is required. Normally the 
124 soldier's handbook 
162-165 
unit is halted, faced in the desired direction, and started 
forward again by the commands: 1. forward, 2. MARCH. 
■ 163. Being in Column, to Change Direction.—The com- 
mands are: 1. COLUMN RIGHT (LEFT) (HALF RIGHT) (HALF LEFT) , 
2. MARCH. At the command march, the leading man exe- 
cutes the movement as prescribed in paragraph 99a and b. 
The other men in the column execute the same movement 
successively and on the same ground as the leading man. 
□ 164. Being in Line, to Take Interval and Assemble.—a. To 
take interval, the commands are: 1. take interval to the 
left (right) ,2. MARCH. At the command march, the right 
flank man stands fast and extends his left arm at shoulder 
height, palms of the hand down, fingers extended and joined 
until the man on his left obtains the proper interval, then he 
drops his arm. Other men face to the left in marching and 
step out until they have an interval of two arms’ length from 
the man on their right. Each man, except the one on the 
left who raises his right arm only, extends both arms later- 
ally at shoulder height. Each man, except the right flank 
man, then turns his head and eyes to the right and places 
himself in line so that the finger tips of his right hand touch 
lightly the finger tips of the left hand of the man on his right. 
As soon as each man alines himself at two arms’ length inter- 
vals from the man on his right, he drops his right arm to 
the side and turns his head and eyes to the front. He drops 
his left arm to the side when the man on his left has obtained 
his proper interval. If under arms, rifles will be slung prior 
to the execution of this movement. 
b. To assemble, the commands are: 1. assemble to the 
right (left) ,2. MARCH. At the command march, the right 
flank man stands fast. All other men face to the right in 
marching and form at normal intervals as in paragraph 153 a. 
■ 165. To Stack Arms.—The squad being in line at normal or 
close interval, the commands are: 1. stack, 2. ARMS. The 
second man from the right and the second man from the 
left of the squad make the stacks. If there are less than 
six men in the squad, only one stack is made, the second man 
from the right making it. If there are more than eight men 
125 165-167 
soldier’s handbook 
in the squad, three stacks will be made, the center or right 
center man making the center stack. The stack is made as 
follows: At the command arms, the man on the left of the 
stackman regrasps his rifle with the right hand at the bal- 
ance, carrying it to the horizontal position, barrel up, and 
passes his rifle to the stackman who grasps it with his left 
hand between the upper sling swivel and stacking swivel and 
places the butt between his feet, barrel to the front, muzzle 
inclined slightly to the front, the thumb and forefinger rais- 
ing the stacking swivel. The stackman then throws the butt 
of his own rifle two feet in advance of that of his left file and 
6 inches to the right of his right toe; at the same time he 
allows his right hand to slip to the stacking swivel and en- 
gages his rifle with that of his left file. The man on the right 
of the stackman raises his rifle with his right hand, regrasps 
it with his right hand at the balance, steps to the left front 
keeping his right foot in place, and carries his rifle well for- 
ward, barrel to the front; the left hand guiding the stacking 
swivel engages the lower hook of the swivel of his own rifle 
with the free hook of that of his left file, and then turns the 
barrel outward into the angle formed by the other two rifles 
and lowers the butt to the ground so that it will form a 
uniform stack with the other two rifles. He then assumes 
the position of attention. Other rifles of the squad are passed 
toward the nearest stack and laid on the stack by the stack- 
man. 
■ 166. To Take Arms.—The squad being in line behind the 
stacks, the commands are: 1. take, 2. ARMS. At the com- 
mand arms, the procedure of stacking arms is reversed. The 
loose rifles are first passed back. In breaking the stack, the 
stackman grasps his rifle and that of the man on his left, 
so that the rifles will not fall when the man on the right 
raises and disengages his rifle. Each man, as he receives his 
rifle, resumes the position of order arms. 
■ 167. Column of Twos.—When marching small groups, not 
at drill, the group may be marched in column of twos by form- 
ing it in two ranks and giving the command; 1. right (left), 
2. FACE. 
126 soldier’s handbook 
■ 168. To Form Column of Twos From Single File and 
Re-form.—a. The squad being in column, at a halt, to form 
column of twos, the commands are: 1. form column of 
twos, 2. MARCH. At the command march, the leading man 
stands fast; the second man in the squad moves by the 
oblique until he is to the left of and abreast of the corporal 
Figure 50.—T0 stack arms. 
with normal interval, and halts; the third man moves for- 
ward unto behind the corporal with normal distance and 
halts; the fourth man moves by the oblique until he is to 
the left of and abreast of the third man with normal 
interval, and halts; and so on. 
b. The squad being in column of twos, in marching, to 
re-form single file, the squad is first halted. The commands 
are: 1. form single file from the right, 2. MARCH. At 
127 soldier’s handbook 
the command march, the leading man of the right column 
moves forward, the leading man of the left column steps 
off to the right oblique, then executes left oblique so as to 
follow the right file at normal distance. Remaining twos 
follow successively in like manner. 
Figure 50.—To stack arms—Continued. 
128 soldier's handbook 
169-171 
Section II 
THE PLATOON 
■ 169. Formations of More Than One Squad.—a. The 
squads form in line, one behind the other, with 40 inches 
distance between ranks. 
b. Squads are usually arranged to produce a three- or 
four-rank formation so that by facing to the right the unit 
will march in column of threes or column of fours depending 
on the number of squads. 
c. A two-squad unit forms in two ranks and marches in 
column of twos. 
d. A three-squad unit forms in three ranks and marches 
in column of threes. 
e. A four-squad unit forms in four ranks and marches in 
column of fours, 
/. A platoon composed of two sections of two squads each 
forms in four ranks and marches in column of fours. 
g. Movements are described herein for column of threes 
or fours and may be executed by either formation. 
h. When in line, the platoon is alined as prescribed for 
the squad in paragraph 157. The alinement of each rank is 
verified by the platoon leader. 
i. The platoon being in line takes interval and assembles 
as prescribed for the squad in paragraph 164. This move- 
ment may be ordered after ranks are opened for the display 
of field equipment or for other special purpose. It is not 
utilized in forming for physical training. 
■ 170. Composition and Formation of the Platoon.—The 
platoon consists of platoon headquarters and several squads. 
Platoon headquarters consists of a platoon leader and one 
or more assistants. For purposes of drill and ceremonies, a 
three-squad or four-squad formation should be arranged 
and the size of the squads equalized. Figure 51 shows how 
the platoon formation applies to a rifle platoon. 
■ 171. Position of Individuals.—a. The platoon leader takes 
position six paces in front of the center of his platoon when 
129 171-173 
soldier’s handbook 
in line. In march formation (column of threes or fours), he 
marches at the head of his platoon as shown in figure 51. 
b. The second in command of a platoon takes position on 
the left of the left man of the rear rank when squads are 
in line unless otherwise indicated. When squads are in col- 
umn, he follows the rear man in the right squad of the unit. 
The second in command observes the conduct of the unit, 
sees that the proper formation is maintained, and that com- 
mands are promptly and properly executed. The platoon 
guide (a sergeant or other specially designated noncommis- 
sioned officer) is posted on the right of the right flank man 
of the front rank when in line. In column, he takes post 
in front of the right flank man. He is responsible for main- 
taining the proper direction and cadence of march of the 
platoon. 
c. Other noncommissioned officers (such as mess and sup- 
ply sergeants, clerks, etc.) and privates (such as cooks, 
armorers, etc.), when attached to the platoon, fall in on the 
left when in line (or in rear when squads are in column) 
and march as part of regularly organized squads. 
■ 172. To Form the Platoon.—a. The command is: PALL 
IN. At the command fall in, the first squad forms in line, 
as prescribed in paragraph 153 a, its center opposite and 
three paces from the platoon sergeant. The other squads 
form in rear of the first squad and in the same manner, with 
40 inches distance between ranks. Members of the rear 
squads extend their arms to obtain their approximate in- 
tervals but cover the corresponding members in the first 
squad. The guide places himself as shown in figure 51. 
b. To form with close interval, the commands are: 1. at 
close interval, 2. FALL IN. At the command fall in, th-' 
movement is executed as prescribed in a above except that 
squads form at close interval (par. 153b). 
c. The platoon is ordinarily formed and dismissed by the 
platoon sergeant. 
■ 173. To Dismiss the Platoon.—The commands are: 1. in- 
spection, 2. ARMS, 3. port, 4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED, or 3. 
UNLOCK PIECES, 4. DISMISSED (if armed with the Ml 
rifle). 
130 SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
♦ 
(5 Paces 
RIFLE 
SQUAD 
40 Inches 
Arm's Length 
RIFLE 
SQUAD 
RIFLE 
SQUAD 
1. Rifle platoon in line faced to the front 
40 Inches 
Arm's Length 
Direction of march 
40 Inches 
2, At the commands: 1 Right 2. FACE, The platoon faces to the 
right Platoon leader and guide change to new positions 
At the commands: 1. Forward 2. MARCH It moves off 
40 Inches 
4 Inches 
3. At the commands: 1. Close 2. MARCH The squad columns close to> 
the center to 4-inch intervals 
Direction of march 40 Inche3 
PLATOON IN LINE BEING MARCHED TO THE RIGHT 
Platoon Leader 
E><j Second in Command 
(XI Platoon Guide 
Squad Leader 
L Second in Command of Squad 
I • I Messenger 
Figure 51.—Platoon In line, marched to the right. 
131 174-177 
soldier's handbook 
■ 174. To March the Platoon.—a. The normal formation 
for marching is in column of threes (or fours) with squad 
columns abreast, squad leaders at the head of their squads. 
b. The platoon in line marches to the left or to the front 
only for minor changes of position. 
c. The platoon being in line to march to the right, the 
commands are: 1. right, 2. FACE, 3. forward, 4. MARCH. 
This marches the platoon in column of threes (or fours) to 
the right. 
■ 175. Guide in Marching.—Except when otherwise directed, 
men in ranks keep the proper distance and interval and aline 
themselves on the men toward the flank on which the guide is 
marching. When it is desired to guide toward the left, the 
command is: GUIDE LEFT. The guide and the platoon 
leader then change their relative positions. 
B 176. Being in Column of Threes (or Fours) at Normal 
Interval Between Squads, To March (or Form) at Close 
Interval.—a. The commands are: 1. close, 2. MARCH. At 
the command march, the squads close to the center by ob- 
liquing until the interval between men is 4 inches. The center 
squad (or squads) take up the half step until the dress has 
been regained. The distance, 40 inches, remains unchanged. 
b. If this movement is executed from the halt, the squads 
close toward the center by executing right or left step until 
4-inch intervals are reached. If in column of threes, the 
first and third squads left and right step two steps. If in 
column of fours, the second and third squads left and right 
step one step, the first and fourth squads left and right 
step three steps. 
■ 177. Being in Column of Threes (or Fours) at Close 
Interval Between Squads, to March (or Form) at Normal 
Interval.—a. The commands are: 1. extend, 2. MARCH. At 
the command march, the squads open to the right and left 
from the center by obliquing until the interval between men 
is one arm’s length. The center squad (or squads) will take 
up the half step until the dress has been regained. 
b. If this movement is executed at the halt, the squads 
execute right or left step until they have secured the proper 
132 SOLDIER'S HANDBOOK 
177-182 
interval by reversing the procedure outlined in paragraph 
176 b. 
■ 178. Being in Column of Threes (or Fours), to Change 
Direction.—The commands are: 1. column right (left), 2. 
MARCH. At the command march, given as the right foot 
strikes the ground, the right flank man of the leading rank 
faces to the right in marching as prescribed in paragraph 99 
a and b, and takes up the half step until the other men of his 
rank are abreast of him, then he resumes the full step. The 
other men of the leading rank oblique to the right in march- 
ing without changing interval, place themselves abreast of 
the pivot man and conform to his step. The ranks in rear 
of the leading rank execute the movement on the same 
ground, and in the same manner, as the leading rank. 
■ 179. Being in Column of Threes (or Fours), to Form 
Line to the Front.—The commands are: 1. column right, 
2. MARCH, 3. platoon, 4. HALT, 5. left, 6. FACE. Column 
right is executed as prescribed in paragraph 178. The com- 
mand halt is given after the change of direction is completed. 
■ 180. Being in Any Formation in March, to March To- 
ward a Plank.—The commands are: 1. by the right (left) 
flank 2. MARCH. This movement is executed as prescribed 
for the squad in paragraph 162. If the platoon is in column 
at close (4-inch) intervals, the squads in rear of the squad 
which becomes the leading squad take up the half-step until 
they each reach 40 inches’ distance from the squad ahead. 
This movement is used only for short distances. 
■ 181. Stack Arms.—Before stacking arms ranks are opened. 
Arms are then stacked by each squad as prescribed in para- 
graph 165. 
■ 182. Being in Line, to Open and Close Ranks.—a. To open 
ranks the commands are: 1. open ranks, 2. MARCH, 3. ready, 
4. FRONT. At the command march, the front rank takes 
three steps forward, halts, and executes dress right. The 
second rank takes two steps forward, halts, and executes 
dress right. The third rank takes one step forward, halts, 
and executes dress right. The fourth rank, if any, executes 
133 182-183 
SOLDIER’S handbook 
dress right. The platoon leader places himself on the flank 
of the platoon toward which the dress is to be made, one pace 
from and in prolongation of the front rank and facing down 
the line. From this position he alines the front rank. The 
second and third ranks are alined in the same manner. In 
moving from one rank to another, the platoon leader faces to 
the left in marching. After verifying the alinement of the 
rear rank, he faces to the right in marching, moves three 
paces beyond the front rank, halts, faces to the left and 
commands: 1. ready, 2. FRONT. 
h. To close ranks, the commands are: 1. close ranks, 2. 
MARCH. At the command march, the front rank stands 
fast; the second rank takes one step forward and halts; the 
third rank takes two steps forward and halts; and the fourth 
rank, if any, takes three steps forward and halts. Each man 
covers his file leader. 
■ 183. To Form for Shelter Tents.—The platoon being in 
line the commands are: 1. form for shelter tents to the 
LEFT (RIGHT), 2. MARCH, 3. DRESS RIGHT (LEFT), 4. DRESS, 5. 
READY, 6. FRONT, 7. COUNT OFF. 
a. At the command form for shelter tents to the left 
(right) , the second in command moves to a position on the 
right of the guide who is on the right of the right man of 
the front rank. The messenger takes position on the left 
of the left man of the rear rank. 
b. At'the command march, all squads except the front 
squad face to the left In marching and step off. Squad 
leaders by giving the appropriate commands, 1. by the right 
(left) flank, 2. MARCH, and 1. squad, 2. HALT, move their 
squads into line abreast of the squad (s) already on line. 
c. At the commands 3. dress right (left), 4. DRESS, 5. 
ready, 6. FRONT, and 7. COUNT OFF, given by the platoon 
leader the entire rank executes these movements as pre- 
scribed in paragraphs 156 and 157. 
d. On direction of the platoon leader, the odd numbers 
draw their bayonets and thrust them into the ground along- 
side the outside of the left heel near the instep. The bayonet 
indicates the position of the front tent pole. Men not 
equipped with bayonets mark the place with the left heel. 
134 soldier’s handbook 
183-184 
Odd and even numbers (Nos. 1 and 2; Nos. 3 and 4; etc.) 
pitch tents together. 
e. To assemble, the platoon is faced to the right and re- 
formed from single file into column of threes (or fours) to 
the right (left) as prescribed in paragraph 184c(2). The 
platoon sergeant and messenger resume their normal posts. 
■ 184. Column of Twos and Single File and Re-form.—The 
platoon may be marched in column of twos or single file by 
the procedure given below. This is not a precise movement. 
It is practiced in drill so that when necessary the movement 
(RIGHT AND CENTER 
LEFT 
SQUAD 
SQUADS ARE 
MARCHING) 
CENTER SQUAD 
Figure 52.—Column of twos from column of threes 
RIGHT SQUAD 
CLEFT SQUAD MARCHING 
TO ITS PLACE IN 
SINGLE FILE) 
(RIGHT AND CENTER 
SQUADS ARE HALTED) 
CENTER SQUAD 
RIGHT SQUAD 
Figure 53.—Re-form column of threes from column of twos. 
may be executed smoothly and without delay. The change 
of column is always made from a halt. 
a. (1) The platoon being in column of threes, at a halt, 
to form column of twos, the commands are: 1. column op 
twos from the right (left) , 2. MARCH. At the command 
march, the right two squads march forward; the left squad 
forms column of twos as prescribed for the squad and then 
executes column half right and column half left so as to 
follow in column the leading squads. Forty-inch distances 
are maintained. 
(2) The platoon being in column of twos, at a halt, to re- 
form in column of threes, the commands are: 1. column of 
135 soldier’s handbook 
threes to the left (right), 2. MARCH. At the command 
march, the leading two squads stand fast. The rear squad 
forms single file from the right as prescribed in paragraph 
168b and moves to its normal place beside the leading 
squads by executing column half left then column half 
right. It is halted when its leading file is on line with the 
leading rank of the platoon. 
b. (1) The platoon being in column of fours, at a halt, to 
form column of twos, the commands are: 1. column of twos 
from the right (left), 2. MARCH. At the command march, 
the right two squads march forward; the left two squads 
initially stand fast, then follow the leading two squads by 
executing column half right and column half left. Forty- 
inch distances are maintained. 
(2) The platoon being in column of twos, at a halt, to re- 
form in column of fours, the commands are: 1. column of 
fours to the left {right), 2. MARCH. At the command 
march, the leading two squads stand fast. The two rear 
squads move to their normal places by executing column 
half left then column half right and are halted when the 
leading files are on line with the leading rank of the platoon. 
c. (1) The platoon being in column of threes (or fours), 
at a halt, to form single file, the commands are: 1. column 
of files from the right (left), 2. MARCH. At the com- 
mand march, the right squad of the platoon moves forward. 
The other squads stand fast initially and then successively 
follow the leading squad by executing column half right and 
column half left. Distances of 40 inches are maintained. 
(2) The platoon being in single file, at a halt, to re-form 
in column of threes (or fours), the commands are; 1. column 
OF THREES (OR FOURS) TO THE LEFT (RIGHT), 2. MARCH. At 
the command march, the leading squad stands fast. The 
other squads move to their normal places by executing 
column half left, then, at the proper time, column half 
right and are halted when the leading file is on line with 
the leading rank of the platoon. 
d. Whenever commands are given involving movements of 
squads in which one squad stands fast, takes up the march, 
continues the march, or changes formation, the squad leader 
gives the appropriate commands. 
136 CHAPTER 10 
INTERIOR GUARD DUTY 
■ 185. At each post, camp, or station where troops are present 
guards are used to preserve order, protect property, and en- 
force police regulations. The commanding officer of the camp 
or post determines how large a guard is necessary for these 
purposes and issues the necessary orders. When your com- 
pany, troop, or battery commander decides that you have 
made sufficient progress in your military training, you will 
probably be detailed for guard duty. The following informa- 
tion will help you in understanding what this duty will be: 
■ 186. The guard consists of— 
Officer of the day. 
Officer of the guard (except when the guard is small). 
Sergeant of the guard. 
Corporals of the guard. 
Buglers of the guard. 
Privates of the guard. 
The guard is under the supervision of the officer of the day. 
■ 187. The members of the guard may all come from the 
same company, troop, or battery, or they may be detailed 
from several different organizations. In either case, when 
a soldier has served a tour of guard duty he is given credit 
for it on the guard roster and does not again do guard duty 
until all other men on the roster have served their tours. 
■ 188. The length of a tour of guard duty is 24 hours. At 
the end of that time the “old guard” is relieved by the “new 
guard” of the same size. As soon as the new guard relieves 
the old guard at the guardhouse it is divided into three parts 
called “reliefs.” These reliefs are rotated so that each mem- 
ber of the guard has 2 hours on duty followed by 4 hours off 
duty. Privates of the guard are assigned to reliefs by the 
sergeant of the guard, and to posts by the corporals of their 
137 188-192 
soldier’s handbook 
reliefs. Privates are not changed from one relief to another 
during the same tour of duty, except by proper authority. 
■ 189. While you are off duty do not remove your clothing or 
equipment or leave the immediate vicinity of the guardhouse 
without permission of the commander of the guard. An 
emergency may occur when you will be needed at once. 
■ 190. When you are not posted as a sentinel or on other 
duty which requires you to carry your rifle, keep it in the arms 
rack in the guardhouse or in a stack. 
■ 191. Orders for sentinels are of two classes: general orders 
and special orders. General orders apply to all sentinels. 
Special orders apply to particular posts and duties. You 
must know and be able to recite the general orders before 
you go on guard duty. As soon as you are assigned to a 
relief and a particular post you must also learn and be able 
to recite the special orders for that post. Whenever the 
officer of the day or the commander of the guard considers 
that a sentinel does not have sufficient instruction or is 
otherwise unfit for guard duty, he relieves him, sends him 
back to his organization, andi notifies his organization com- 
mander. 
■ 192. The following are the general orders all sentinels are 
required to memorize. Learn them as soon as you can. 
My general orders are— 
1. To take charge of this\ post and all Government prop- 
erty in view. 
2. To walk my post in a military manner, keeping alivays 
on the alert and observing everything that takes place within 
sight or hearing. 
3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to 
enforce. 
4. To report all calls from posts more distant from the 
guardhouse than my own. 
5. To quit my post only when properly relieved. 
6. To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves 
me all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the 
day, and officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard 
only. 
138 soldier’s handbook 
192-193 
7. To talk to no one except in line of duty. 
8. To give the alarm in case of fire or disorder. 
9. To call the corporal of the guard in any case not covered 
\by instructions. 
10. To salute all officers and all colors and standards not 
cased. 
11. To be especially watchful at night and, during the time 
for challenging, to challenge alt persons on or near my post, 
and to allow no one to pass without proper authority. 
■ 193. Guard duty is one of your most important duties. 
Remember that when you are posted as a sentinel you repre- 
sent the commanding officer whose orders you are required 
to enforce, on and in the vicinity of your post. Upon the 
manner in which you perform your duties depends not only 
the enforcement of military law and orders, but also the 
security of persons and property under your charge. In time 
of war your responsibility as a member of the guard is greater 
than ever, for then the safety of your organization depends 
upon the manner in which you watch while your comrades 
rest. This is so important that sleeping on post by a sentinel 
or other improper performance of duty is punishable by a very 
severe court-martial sentence. 
139 CHAPTER 11 
MARCHES, CAMPS, AND BIVOUACS 
Paragraphs 
Section I. Marches 194-198 
11. Camps and bivouacs 199-202 
Section I 
MARCHES 
■ 194. One of your principal jobs in the field is marching. 
Battles take place at indefinite intervals, but marches occur 
daily. To win battles troops must arrive on the battlefield on 
time and in good physical condition. To accomplish this they 
must be able to march. 
■ 195. Preparations.—a. When you learn that your organi- 
zation is to make a march the next day there are certain things 
you should attend to the evening before. See that your can- 
teen is clean and filled with fresh water as there may be little 
time for this in the morning. Check your personal equipment 
and see that you have all the articles necessary for personal 
cleanliness, and for keeping your clothing in repair. This 
should include towel, soap, toothbrush, pocket comb, small 
mirror, needles, thread, safety pins, and spare buttons. Check 
up on the adjustment of your pack straps and belt. A poorly 
adjusted pack adds to the discomfort and fatigue of a march. 
You should have at least two pairs of woolen socks without 
holes or mends. See that your shoes or boots fit comfortably, 
are in good repair, and well broken in. Never start a march 
with a new pair of shoes or boots. If you are in a mounted 
organization inspect your equipment carefully and replace 
any missing or doubtful parts. Nose bags should be filled with 
the morning feed as soon as the animals have finished their 
evening feed of grain. Grain bags should be filled before dark. 
If you are on guard, you should know where to find the cooks 
and when to awaken them. 
Before dark dispose of any trash or debris that may have 
collected in or around your tent area. This will save you time 
140 soldier’s handbook 
195-197 
and effort in the morning, especially if your organization is to 
break camp before daylight. Our Army takes pride in always 
leaving a camp site in better condition than we found it. 
b. On the morning of the march turn out promptly at the 
first call for reveille, perform your toilet, and make up your 
roll and pack, or pack your saddle. According to the instruc- 
tions of your commanding officer you will water and feed your 
animal, if mounted, eat breakfast, and wash and pack your 
mess kit. After breakfast you will be allowed 10 or 15 minutes 
to relieve yourself and complete your pack and roll. While 
drivers warm their motors, or harness and hitch their ani- 
mals, other soldiers help in packing the kitchen, taking down 
the officers’ tents and picket line, and loading the forage, fill- 
ing the sink and latrines, and cleaning the camp area. In 
mounted organizations, after the order to saddle, you must 
take particular care to see that the blanket is free of sand or 
cockleburs, and is without wrinkles. You should know your 
duties and do them promptly and quietly without confusion or 
noise. At assembly, fall in fully equipped for marching. 
■ 196. When you fall in to start the march, do it quietly. 
One of the indications of a well trained organization is the 
absence of noise and confusion when starting a march. 
When you are close to the enemy it will be necessary to main- 
tain quiet for your own protection as he will be on the alert 
for noises which will help him locate your position. Even 
when you are at a distance from the enemy, or making a 
practice march in peace, loud talking and shouting will dis- 
turb civilian communities or troops camped nearby who are 
trying to rest. 
■ 197. Conduct of Individuals.—a. Drinking water on a 
march is largely a matter of habit. Drink plentifully before 
the start of the march, but after that drink sparingly. Drink 
none at all for the first 3or 4 hours of the march. After that, 
take only a few mouthfuls at the end of a rest period to wash 
out the throat and mouth. A small pebble carried in the 
mouth keeps it moist and reduces thirst. Do not drink or 
eat unwholesome foods or beverages. Use only water ap- 
proved by your commander. The eating of sweets greatly 
increases thirst and should be avoided. When a cooked meal 
141 soldier’s handbook 
is carried do not eat it until the proper time. Excessive 
perspiration causes the loss to the body of necessary salts; 
this results in fatigue and heat exhaustion. The eating of 
common table salt or salt tablets, helps to relieve this condi- 
tion. Cold coffee or tea will also help. 
b. You will remember that in chapter 1 it was stated that 
civilians will judge your organization and the Army by the 
conduct and appearance of its members in public. This is 
especially true of troops on the march. Avoid using pro- 
fane or obscene language or making remarks to civilians. 
When you do this, you are not only proving that you are 
lacking in military discipline but' are causing your organiza- 
tion to be considered as poorly trained. This is unfair to 
your comrades. 
c. Halts are made at regular intervals to rest the men and 
animals, to service motors, to adjust equipment, and for other 
purposes. A halt of 15 minutes is usually made at the end 
of the first 45 minutes of marching. After the first halt, 
columns including foot or mounted troops usually halt for 
10 minutes each hour. These halts are for the purpose of 
permitting men and animals to relieve themselves, adjust 
equipment, and inspect animals, motors, vehicles, and load- 
ing. Attend to these things promptly. Do not wait until the 
command is ready to march again. A mounted man always 
attends to the needs of his horse and equipment before satis- 
fying his own wants. You should inspect each foot of your 
horse to see that no shoes have become loosened, or that no 
stones have become wedged in the frog or shoe. Remove 
caked mud or snow with the hoof hook. If you are the 
driver of a motor vehicle, conduct the general mechanical in- 
spection as you have been instructed, and report promptly the 
results of your inspection to your chief of section or other 
designated person. 
d. After you have adjusted your own equipment and that 
of your mount, or completed your vehicle inspection, rest as 
much as possible during the remainder of the halt. Do not 
stand or wander about. If the ground is dry, remove your 
pack and stretch out at full length in as comfortable a posi- 
tion as possible. The next best way is to sit down with a 
good back rest against a tree, fence, or embankment. Never 
142 soldier’s handbook 
197-198 
sit or lie on wet ground. If you find it necessary to answer 
the calls of nature, dig a small pit and immediately refill it 
after use. 
e. Do not enter private property without permission or 
take fruit or vegetables from orchards and gardens. These 
are serious military offenses. 
■ 198. Road Discipline.—a. General.—(l) In marching, 
troops usually keep to the right of the road, leaving the left 
free for other traffic. If the left of the road has better con- 
cealment from air observation, or for other reasons, troops 
may be directed to march on the left of the road, keeping the 
right free for traffic. On certain occasions they may march 
on both sides of the road leaving the middle clear. 
(2) In any event, your organization commander will an- 
nounce how you will march. The important thing for you to 
remember is that you must stay at all times on the side of the 
road as he has directed, and not straggle back and forth 
across the road or out into the middle. Before your organi- 
zation starts its march other troops, and especially motor 
units, will be informed which parts of the road will be left 
free for them. Acting on this information, motor vehicle 
units may sometimes move as ravidly as 60 miles an hour past 
your column. You can see how easily serious accidents and 
traffic tie-ups may occur if you do not keep your prescribed 
distance and place in the column and interfere with the 
right-of-way of other traffic, both military and civilian. At 
halts, immediately clear the road by moving off to the side 
on which you have been marching, unless otherwise directed. 
At the preparation signal for resuming the march, fall in 
promptly. 
(3) Every march is planned so as to bring troops to a 
certain place at a definite time, and in such good condition 
that they can fight immediately, if required. In order to do 
this a very careful supervision is necessary so that large 
numbers of troops as well as food, ammunition, and other 
supplies can move forward without causing traffic jams. To 
assist in this movement military police are stationed at 
certain critical places and patrol the roads. They wear a blue 
arm band with the letters MP in white. They know on 
which roads it is safe for you to march and at what hours. 
143 soldier’s handbook 
They are there to help and protect you and their instructions 
and orders must be obeyed. 
(4) If you are marching at night, you must make special 
efforts to remain alert. Be careful not to ride or walk too 
close to the man ahead of you, or to lag behind. When night 
marches are made to maintain secrecy, you remain silent and 
smoking and the lighting of matches or flashlights are 
forbidden. 
b. Foot troops.—lf you become sick or unable to continue 
the march, do not fall out until you receive permission from 
an officer. Then wait beside the road for the medical detach- 
ment, which marches at the rear of the column. If you fall 
out without permission, you are subject to arrest by a police 
detachment, which follows the column. Your organization 
will take great pride in the fact that no one has had to fall 
out. If you have made the proper preparations with respect 
to your shoes and socks, and do not eat or drink too much, 
you will have no difficulties with the average march. 
c. Mounted troops.—(l) Do not slouch in the saddle or 
ride with the weight on one buttock. The proper position in 
the saddle will not only be less tiring to you but will probably 
prevent your horse from having a sore back. 
(2) Keep your head up and remain alert. Increase and 
decrease your gait promptly at the command. Failure to do 
this, or to maintain the proper gait, will result in a con- 
tinual stringing out and jamming up of riders in the column. 
This may not only result in injury to the horse but will soon 
tire out both horse and man. 
(3) Be alert to pass signals down the column, especially 
warnings of obstacles in the road, such as bottles, wire, holes, 
and narrow culverts. Failure to do this may result in serious 
injury to someone in rear of you. 
(4) Watch your horse for signs of lameness and ask for 
permission to fall out if such condition is discovered. He 
may have picked up a rock or a nail. If necessary, wait for 
the veterinary officer. 
(5) If you have to fall out, regain your position in the 
column gradually by increasing the length of the trot periods 
and decreasing the length of the walk periods. If you are 
144 soldier’s handbook 
delayed more than 10 minutes, join another organization 
temporarily and rejoin your own organization at one of the 
hourly halts or in bivouac. 
(6) If you are marching at night to maintain secrecy, you 
should be able to inspect your horse’s feet and equipment by 
feeling, and without the aid of a light. 
(7) Select) the best possible footing for your horse. A 
smooth, level surface, even concrete, is to be preferred to 
rough, sloping shoulders found along many highways, 
(8) In removing side loads or equipment at the hourly 
halts be sure they are placed so that they will not be dam- 
aged by horses or be in the way of traffic. Horses moved to 
the side of the road must be kept clear of wire fences so that 
bridles or other parts of equipment do not become caught. 
(9) In horse-drawn artillery units, the cannoneers usually 
ride on the vehicles. When walking, they should keep to the 
right of the column or in the space between vehicles. Under 
no circumstances should they walk between the front and 
rear vehicles of limbered vehicles. 
d. Armored and motorized units.—(l) Since rapid move- 
ment is one of the principal advantages of armored and motor 
units, it is important that every driver and other operating 
personnel with these units know not only how properly to 
drive and care for a vehicle but also the fundamentals of 
successful marching. 
(2) Good mechanized and motorized troops can march 180 
miles per day on roads at an average speed of 25 miles per 
hour, or, in an emergency, they can march 450 miles in 24 
hours. They can march on roads at night without lights at 
speeds up to about 15 miles per hour, but marching across 
country at night is very difficult, except under favorable con- 
ditions. In preparing for a march, warning is usually issued 
ahead of the starting hour so that crews of vehicles can care- 
fully check equipment and vehicles and see to it that every- 
thing is ready and in good condition. 
(3) If you are the driver of a motor vehicle during the 
march you must keep on the alert to maintain the ordered 
speed and the proper distance on the road from the vehicle 
just ahead in the column. You must also be familiar with 
145 soldier’s handbook 
arm, hand, and light signals so that these signals may be 
quickly passed down the column from front to rear. If this is 
not done it causes vehicles to “jam up” in column, and results 
in those at the tail having to travel at high speeds at times, in 
order to keep up and not lose sight of vehicles ahead of them. 
This often results in accidents, especially when passing 
through towns, so it can be seen that bad driving on the 
part of just one driver may spoil the march for an entire unit. 
(4) No rule can be given for the distances which should be 
kept between vehicles in the marching column on the road. 
This will depend on a number of things, such as the ordered 
speed of the march, the kind of vehicles in the column, the 
road conditions and, perhaps most of all, on the possibility 
of an enemy air attack. To lessen the danger of an air attack, 
vehicles and organizations must often march at increased 
distances. When marching at night, speeds are usually re- 
duced and distances lessened so that contact may be main- 
tained in the column. 
(5) Halts are usually prescribed in the march order to come 
at a certain time, and when the time arrives each vehicle 
either halts in place, or closes up so that the entire unit is 
closed up when the last vehicle is halted. Whether vehicles 
halt in place or close up will depend on many factors, but 
drivers are always told what to do about this before the 
march starts. Motor* vehicles will seldom close up during 
daylight, because of the danger of an air attack. 
(6) Before halting, vehicles always move well off the road 
so as to keep the road clear. If men dismount, they also move 
off the road so as not to interfere with other traffic and to 
avoid accidents. Officers, noncommissioned officers, and 
drivers proceed with the necessary inspections and servicing. 
If roads are very narrow, men are usually stationed at the 
head and tail of each unit to direct civilian traffic and see to 
it that the road is kept clear. 
(7) Halts usually come once every 2 hours and are for 10 
minutes’ duration, unless a longer halt is made at noon for 
lunch and servicing. During a march if any vehicle has 
mechanical trouble, the driver pulls off the road and allows 
146 soldier’s handbook 
198-201 
vehicles behind to pass. If the driver or unit mechanic can 
correct the trouble, he does so and resumes the march. He 
does not, however, attempt to regain his place in column by 
picking up high speeds, but falls in at the tail of the nearest 
unit, and does not pass any vehicles until those ahead have 
halted, at which time he may go forward to join his unit. 
If the entire column has passed, he proceeds alone at normal 
speed into camp. 
(8) Every car commander or driver must know the route 
of the march and where the unit is going to camp for the 
night and should have a marked road map. Otherwise he 
will not know where to go if contact with the vehicle ahead is 
lost or his vehicle has to stop on account of mechanical 
trouble. 
Section II 
CAMPS AND BIVOUACS 
■ 199. Kinds op Shelter.—ln the theater of operations, 
troops are sheltered in billets, bivouac, camp, or cantonment. 
a. Troops are in billets when they occupy private or public 
buildings. 
b. When troops rest on the ground with no overhead cover, 
or under shelter tents, or improvised shelter, they are in 
bivouac. 
c. When troops are sheltered by heavy tentage (tent camps) 
they are in camp; when quartered in temporary structures, 
especially constructed for military purposes, they are in can- 
tonment. 
■ 200. Camp Sites.—The ideal camp site should have plenty 
of pure water, tough grass turf, and access to a good road. It 
should be of ample size and provide concealment from enemy 
airplanes. It should avoid dusty, polluted, or damp soil, stag- 
nant water, and dry stream beds. In hot weather a shady 
area free of underbrush is desirable. In war, battle needs 
may force the use of poor camp sites. 
■ 201. Personal Care and Comfort.—a. (1) The shelter tent 
is a small tent capable of providing shelter for two men. 
(See fig. 54.) 
147 soldier's handbook 
Figure 54.—Shelter tents. 
148 SOLDIER'S handbook 
Figure 55.—Double shelter tents. 
149 SOLDIER’S handbook 
(2) It may be pitched singly or two tents may be pitched 
together known as a double shelter tent. (See fig. 55.) Use 
of double shelter tents conserves space and, being occupied 
by four men, they are warmer. 
(3) (a) The platoon having been formed for shelter tent 
pitching as described in paragraph 183 (platoon drill), at the 
command, pitch tents, each man (if armed with the rifle) 
steps off obliquely with the right foot a full pace to the right 
front, lays his rifle on the ground, muzzle to the front, barrel 
to the left, butt near the toe of his right foot. He then steps 
back into place. All men then unsling equipment and place 
their packs (or rolls) on the ground in front of them, haver- 
sacks (saddle bags or field canvas bags) up and to the front, 
the packs two paces in front of their positions. They then 
open their packs and remove their shelter halves, poles, and 
pins.- Each odd-numbered man, when not armed with a 
bayonet, places a pin in the ground on the spot which he 
previously marked with his left heel. The men of each pair 
spread their shelter halves on the ground which the tent is 
to occupy, triangle to the rear, buttons to the center, the 
even-numbered man’s half on the left. 
(£>) They then button the halves together. The odd- 
numbered man adjusts his pole through the eyelets in the 
front of the tent and holds the pole upright in position be- 
side the bayonet (or pin). The even-numbered man pins 
down the front corners of the tent in line with the bayonets 
(or pins). He then drives the front guy pin a rifle length 
in front of the front pole. If he is not armed with the rifle, 
he measures this distance with his tent rope by taking the 
distance from the base of the front tent pole to one of the 
front tent pins. He places the loop of the guy rope over the 
front guy pin and runs the other end of the rope through 
the loops of the shelter halves and ties it, making sure that 
the pole is vertical when the rope is taut. The even-num- 
bered man then adjusts the rear tent pole through the eye- 
lets in the rear of the tent. The odd-numbered man pins 
down the rear of the tent and drives the rear guy pin so 
that it is a bayonet length in rear of the rear pin of the 
triangle. If he is not armed with the bayonet, he drives the 
rear guy pin two and a half tent pin lengths from the rear 
150 soldier’s handbook 
201 
triangle pin. He then adjusts the guy rope. The even-num- 
bered man then drives the remaining pins on the left of the 
shelter tent and the odd-numbered man drives them on the 
right. 
(c) On maneuvers and in active operations you and your 
tentmate will normally pitch your tent where you will be 
concealed from enemy observation. The principles of tent 
pitching given in (a) and (£>) above will apply, but there 
may be no attempt to aline the tents of your organization. 
(4) If possible, pick a dry place on high ground for your 
tent. As soon as your tent is pitched, ditch it, even though 
you expect to be there only one night. Dig a ditch about 3 
inches deep along each side, with a drainage ditch leading 
off at the lowest side. If it looks as though water may come 
from higher ground, dig a ditch to divert the water before it 
can reach your tent. In cold or windy weather the dirt 
should be banked around the tent. If it rains, loosen the 
guy ropes to prevent the tent pegs from pulling out. Be 
sure your ient pegs are securely driven in. If the weather 
is cold, pitch the closed end of the tent into the wind. 
(5) Figures 28 and 29 show you in detail how to display 
your equipment, if it is required. 
b. Take time to make a good bed; it will mean better sleep- 
ing. First, level the ground. Then place straw, leaves, or 
branches on the ground. Place your raincoat over this bed- 
ding to keep out the damp. In cold weather you need some- 
thing warm under you as well as over you. A newspaper be- 
tween blankets and clothing, or straw around the feet, will 
help. Don’t lie down directly on wet ground. 
Another means for protection against cold is to fold the 
blanket in such a manner as to form a sleeping bag. Large 
horse-blanket safety pins or any large safety pins are neces- 
sary to keep the folds in position. 
c. Take off any wet clothes as soon as you can after reach- 
ing camp. Put on dry clothes, or, if that is impossible, dry your 
clothes before a fire and then put them back on. If you can- 
not do this, wring them out. Dry your shoes by placing warm, 
not hot, pebbles inside the shoes. Do not place the shoes next 
to a fire. It is a good idea to oil the shoes while they are dry to 
make them waterproof and pliable. 
151 201-202 
soldier’s handbook 
d. (1) As soon as possible after reaching camp wash your 
feet with soap and water. Dry them carefully, especially be- 
tween the toes. Until your feet are hardened, dust them with 
foot powder, which you can get from your corporal or the 
noncommissioned officer in charge of your unit. Put on a clean 
pair of socks and the extra pair of shoes. 
(2) If blisters have appeared on your feet they should be 
painted with iodine and emptied by pricking them at the lower 
edge with a pin which has been passed through a flame. Do 
not remove the skin. The blister should then be covered with 
zinc oxide plaster which can be obtained at the aid station. If 
you have serious abrasions on your feet, corns, bunions, or in- 
growing nails, have your name put on the sick report and 
report to the aid station for treatment. 
(3) See that your toenails are short and clean. Cut them 
straight across and not on a curve. This prevents ingrowing 
nails. 
e. Before building a fire, clear away all dry leaves or grass, 
leaving a bare spot. Dead branches from trees are more apt 
to burn than wood gathered off the ground. Stones heated 
red hot and then placed under a bucket in your tent make a 
good stove. A canteen filled with hot water makes a good 
hot water bottle for very cold feet. 
f. Read instructions for camp sanitation in chapter 14. 
■ 202. Camps and Bivouacs for Mounted Organizations.—a. 
In campaign your organization will probably be scattered over 
a large area to take advantage of cover from ground and air. 
It will often be necessary to tie horses individually to trees 
or bushes. Soldiers are grouped together by squads or sec- 
tions, and bivouac close to their mounts to care for them and 
be able to leave at short notice, or in the dark. Provide good, 
dry standing ground for your horse, clear of rocks and stub- 
ble, and bed him down well. Guard against the possibility of 
his becoming entangled in the halter rope or picket line. 
b. In severe weather protect your horse from cold winds. 
If woods with heavy undergrowth are not available, protec- 
tion may be obtained by using the branches of trees. Avoid 
stream beds in rainy seasons, as a freshet upstream might 
cause trouble. 
152 soldier’s handbook 
c. By taking the precautions mentioned above it will not 
normally be necessary to use the saddle blanket as a horse 
cover because the weather is severe. Horses in good condi- 
tion can withstand severe weather very well. If your horse 
becomes ill from exhaustion or other causes, even in hot 
weather, it may be necessary to keep him warm and the 
saddle blanket is useful for this purpose. You will be well 
repaid for the care and attention you give your mount. 
d. Vehicles should stand on hard ground and be grouped 
for ease of servicing and to prevent hostile observation by 
the use of natural cover or camouflage. Space is required for 
turn-arounds and at least two exits from the bivouac area 
are desirable. 
273916°—41 6 
153 CHAPTER 12 
USE OP COMPASSES AND MAPS 
Paragraphs 
Section I. of the compass 203-207 
11. Use of maps 208-216 
Section I 
USE OP THE COMPASS 
D 203. As a soldier, you must be thoroughly familiar with 
the compass and know how to use it by day and by night. 
B 204, Of the several types of compasses issued to the Army, 
the prismatic compass (see figs. 56 and 57) is the one most 
generally used. The compass is an instrument which, by 
means of a magnetized dial-needle, indicates magnetic 
north. The dial-needle bis graduated into SCO equal subdi- 
visions called degrees, commencing with 0 (zero), or magnetic 
north, and reading clockwise around the entire circle until 0 
(or 360°) is reached again. You will note that with the com- 
pass dial-needle at rest the 0 is to the north, the 90° gradua- 
tion is east, 180° is south, 270° is west. Instead of using the 
directions north, east, south, and west, we may use the terms 
magnetic-azimuth 0°; magnetic-azimuth 180°, etc. The 
magnetic-azimuth of any object is merely the compass read- 
ing, expressed in degrees, of a line extending out from the 
center of the compass toward the object. 
B 205. If a line is drawn from the center of the dial-needle 
to any object in your view you can find its azimuth by de- 
termining which number, or degree of graduation, this line 
crosses on the compass dial. It is done in this manner: Raise 
the eyepiece a and the cover d and move the clamp at fir 
releasing the dial (b) so that it swings freely. Hold the 
compass as shown in figure 56. Turn about slowly and 
carefully until the object, the azimuth of which you want, 
is lined up by the slit on eyepiece a and by the hair-line / on 
the glass cover. Allow the dial-needle b to come to rest. 
Then read the azimuth through the eyepiece a. 
154 soldier’s handbook 
206-207 
■ 206. At night you may often depend on your compass 
almost entirely to keep on a required direction. Assume you 
are to march at night on a magnetic azimuth of 55°. By 
daylight, or at night by light in a sheltered place, release the 
compass box glass by unscrewing the screw at h. Move the 
radiollte marker c on the movable index ring to 55, the grad- 
uation halfway between the figure 5(50) and 6(60) on the 
graduated circle around the outside of the compass case. 
Figure 56.—Prismatic compass, showing compass open and in posi- 
tion for measuring azimuth, in daylight. 
Then clamp the movable ring with the screw at h. Now 
hold the compass horizontally and carefully turn about until 
the dial-needle points to the radiolite marker c on the mov- 
able index ring. The magnetic-azimuth course of 55° is now 
indicated by the radiolite markers j. On a dark night it may 
be necessary for another soldier to move forward to the limit 
of visibility while from the rear you use the compass to direct 
his movement to the right or left in the proper direction. 
While still in sight of you your comrade halts, waits for you to 
come abreast, and then repeats as necessary. 
■ 207. The compass may be used in a number of ways, all of 
which can be practiced by you until you are thoroughly pro- 
ficient in its use. 
155 208-209 
SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
Section II 
USE OF MAPS 
■ 208. The ability to read a map quickly and accurately is ol 
great importance to you as a soldier. With this ability, and a 
map in your possession, you will always be able to locate your- 
self in unfamiliar country. You will be able to accomplish 
your mission without wasting valuable time in searching for 
Figure 57.—Prismatic compass, showing compass open for measure- 
ment of azimuth at night by means of radiolite marker. 
your destination, and you will be able to return to your com- 
mander in time for the information you have obtained to be 
of value to him. 
■ 209. Map reading is not difficult. It is nothing more than 
the ability to get a clear idea of what the ground looks like 
156 soldier's handbook 
209-210 
from seeing a map of that ground. You will probably receive 
further instruction from your officers in map reading, but if 
you have a good grasp of the following simple facts you can 
feel confident that you know how to understand and use 
military maps. 
■ 210. a. A map represents a part of the earth’s surface shown 
on paper. Maps are drawn to scale. This means that a cer- 
tain distance on a map always represents on that map a cer- 
tain distance on the ground. For example; suppose the scale of 
a map is 1 inch equals 1 mile. This means that if, with a ruler, 
you find that on the map, the distance between two towns, A 
and B, is 1 inch, you would actually travel 1 mile if you walked 
in a straight line from Atoß on the ground. If the distance 
between towns C and D on this map is 2 inches then we imme- 
diately know that actually these two towns are twice as far 
apart on the ground as A and B. 
h. Scales are usually shown on a map in one of three ways, as 
follows: 
(1) They may be shown by a single or double line, divided 
into parts. Each part is marked with the distance which it 
represents on the ground and may be expressed in feet, yards, 
or miles. This is the way the scale is shown on automobile 
road maps, with which you are familiar (fig. 58A). 
(2) The scale may be stated in words or figures, as 3 inches= 
1 mile. As explained above, this means that 3 inches on the 
map equals 1 mile on the ground (fig. 58B). 
(3) The scale may be expressed as a “representative frac- 
tion” (called RF), which is merely a fraction in which the 
numerator (above the line) is a certain distance on the map, 
and the denominator (below the line) is the corresponding 
distance on the ground. Suppose the scale of our map is 1 inch 
equals 1 mile. We could write the fraction For con- 
-1 mile 
venience, however, we always write RF with both the numer- 
ator and denominator in the same unit. Since we know there 
are 63,360 inches in a mile, we can write RF lnc-~— 
63,360 inches 
and, by omitting the word “inches”, we have L- So when 
oo,oou 
157 210-211 
SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
we see a map with the RF - * , or written as a ratio 
bo.obO 
1:63,360, we know that 1 inch on the map equals 1 mile on the 
ground (fig. 580. In the same way, if we have a map with 
1 6 
the RF ■ ■ we can change the fraction to - and 
10,560 bo, 360 
we see at once that the RF ■ * -is the same thing as 
10,5b0 
though it were written 6 inches equal 1 mile. 
30 mile* 
A GRAPHIC SCALE 
3 INCHES = I MILE 
B. WORDS a FIGURES 
OR '’63’36° 
5. REPRESENTATIVE 
FRACTION (R.F.) 
Figure 58.—Scales. 
■ 211. On practically all military maps which you will handle, 
the north is at the top of the map. On many maps the north 
is also shown by an arrow, which points in that direction. 
Sometimes two arrows are used. The arrow with a full barb. 
158 soldier’s handbook 
211-214 
or a star at the end, points toward the north pole or true 
north. The arrow with a half barb points toward what is 
known as the magnetic pole which attracts the compass 
needle. 
H 212. a. Your map is said to be “oriented” when the north 
and south arrow on the map points north on the ground. This 
makes all lines on the map parallel to corresponding lines on 
the ground. Your map should always be oriented whenever 
you use it. It is just as awkward to attempt to use an un- 
oriented map as to read a book with the pages turned upside 
down or sideways. 
b. There are two simple and easy ways of orienting your 
map— 
(l) Suppose there are two points on the ground that you 
can also locate on the map. Draw a line on the map between 
these two points which we will call X and Y. Stand at point 
X. Sight along the line X-Y on the map and turn the map 
until the line of sight points exactly at Y on the ground. 
Your map is then oriented. 
(2) You may also orient your map by compass. Turn the 
lid back and down and place the hair-line along the mag- 
netic north-and-south line of the map, the lid lying to the 
north. Turn both the map and compass, keeping the hair- 
line over the magnetic north-and-south line on the map, until 
the compass needle points in exactly the same direction as 
both lines. Your map is then oriented (fig. 59). 
■ 213. You are said to be oriented when you know your own 
position on an oriented map and the directions on the ground. 
Suppose you have been proceeding on a mission over unfa- 
miliar ground and you are not now sure of your location on 
the map. Orient your map. Select a feature of the terrain, 
such as a hill, and from that feature draw a line on the map 
toward yourself. Now do the same with reference to another 
terrain feature. The point where these lines cross or inter- 
sect will be your location on the map. 
B 214. a. One of the most important features of map reading 
will be your ability to determine quickly and accurately the 
positions of various features on the map. A simple and easily 
159 214 
SOLDIER’S HANDBOOK 
DECLINATION 1929 
ANNUAL MAGNETIC 
CHANGE 7" 
(DECREASE) 
- PLACE HAIRLINE OF 
COMPASS LID ON 
MAGNETIC NORTH LINE. 
Figure 59.—Orientation by compass. 
160 soldier's handbook 
214 
understood method is used in our Army which will help you 
to do this. It is known as the system of rectangular coordi- 
nates or the “grid system.” A series of parallel east-and-west 
and north-and-south lines are placed on the map and divided 
into a number of squares. This series of lines is called a 
“grid.” The interval between these lines is usually 1,000 yards, 
that is, each square is 1,000 yards on a side. (See fig. 60.) 
Figure 60.—Rectangular coordinates. 
b. Beginning at the lower left hand, or southwest corner, 
the lines of the grid are numbered. The lines running north 
and south are numbered in order from left to right, that is, 
from west to east. In the same way, the lines running east 
161 214-215 
soldier’s handbook 
and west are numbered from bottom to top, that is, from 
south to north. These numbers are placed on the margins 
of the map. 
c. Now it is very easy to designate any square on the map 
by giving the numbers of the lines which intersect at its 
lower left hand corner. For example, the square containing 
the point B would be designated by giving first the north- 
south line and next the east-west line, with a dash between 
them and inclosed in parentheses, thus (152-267). But since, 
on this particular map, all the north-south lines start with 
15, and all the east-west lines with 26, we can omit the 15 
and the 26 and designate the square containing the letter D 
as (2-7). This expression (2-7) is called the rectangular 
coordinate of the square containing the letter D. The prin- 
cipal thing for you to remember is that you read first the 
number of squares to the right of the southwest corner of 
the map and next the number of squares up. A simple rule 
is: Read right up. 
d. But suppose we wish to designate the point B more 
closely than by just giving the coordinates of the square in 
which it lies. Divide the sides of the square into ten equal 
parts as shown by the dots in figure 60. Now we see that 
B is three subdivisions east of the line 152 and four subdivi- 
sions north of the line 267. Therefore, the coordinates of B 
are (152.3-267.4) or (2.5-7.4). Become familiar with the sys- 
tem of reading and designating map features by means of 
coordinates as rapidly as possible. 
0 215. a. You will probably remember the maps contained 
in your school geographies, as well as the common automobile 
road maps. On these maps certain signs, such as dots, are 
used to represent cities; other signs, soch as wavy lines, repre- 
sent rivers and the boundaries of states or counties. Signs of 
this kind which are used to represent cities, rivers, boundaries, 
mountain ranges, and similar features are known as “con- 
ventional signs.” Military maps are usually of larger scale 
and contain many more details than those commonly met 
with in civil life. Therefore, to represent all the information 
162 soldier’s handbook 
215-216 
set forth on them, it is necessary to use many more con- 
ventional signs than you knew in your school geography. 
Some of the most common conventional signs you will find 
on military maps represent roads, bridges, houses, fences, 
crops, and form lines. 
b. These form lines are called “contours” and represent 
the variations of the earth’s surface caused by hills, ridges, 
valleys, and the like. The exact shape and condition of the 
ground has a great influence on all military operations. The 
map, therefore, must give the person who uses it a clear 
picture of the shape of the ground. Since the map is flat, 
special conventional signs are necessary to show these dif- 
ferent shapes. A contour line represents an imaginary line 
on the ground, every part of which is at the same height 
above sea level. If you walk along a contour line you neither 
go uphill nor downhill but always stay on a level. 
c. You should be able to identify at any time the conven- 
tional signs shown in figure 61. 
■ 216. It often becomes necessary to put on a map either the 
location of various bodies of troops, such as companies, battal- 
ions, oi* regiments; or command posts, observation posts, 
trenches, machine guns, boundaries, or other important data. 
To do this a special list of conventional signs has been pre- 
pared called military symbols. When put on a map, blue is 
used to designate our own forces and red the enemy. A few 
of the commonest are shown in figure 62. 
163 216 
soldier’s handbook 
GOOD ROADS 
POOR ROADS. 
TRAIL 
RAILROAD. 
DOUBLE TRACK R.R. 
NARROW GAGE R.R. 
TELEGRAPH AND TELEPHONE 
LINES 
ELECTRIC POWER 
TRANSMISSION LINES 
BRIDGE 
FERRIES. 
(RIVERS AND STREAMS 
ARE BLUE IN COLORED 
MAPS.) 
FORDS 
DAM 
BUILDINGS 
CHURCH 
HOSPITAL 
SCHOOL 
CEMETERY- 
OR 
OR 
■CEMJ 
ISH 
GRASSLAND 
(GREEN IN COLORED MAPS.) 
MARSH 
WOODS 
(BLUE IN COLORED MAPS) 
(GREEN IN COLORED MAPS) 
Figure 61.—Conventional signs. 
164 soldier’s handbook 
216 
Automatic Rifle 
Caliber .30 machine gun (arrow points 
in main direction of fire) 
Antiaircraft machine gun 
Caliber .50 antitank machine gun 
37-mm GUN 
,81-mm MORTAR 
60-mm MORTAR 
Machine gun, showing sector of fire 
AND DANGER SPACE (SHADED PORTION) 
.Message center. 
Road block 
[IN RED) 
Gassed area (to be avoided) 
.Observation post 
Trench and dugout 
.Tank trap 
Infantry unit 
Armored force unit 
Air corps unit 
Artillery unit (field artillery and 
COAST ARTILLERY OTHER THAN ANTIAIRCRAFT). 
Cavalry unit. 
Chemical warfare unit. 
Coast artillery antiaircraft unit. 
Engineer unit. 
Figure 62.—Military symbols. 
165 216 
soldier’s handbook 
Military Police unit. 
Medical unit. 
.Veterinary unit* 
.Ordnance unit. 
Quartermaster unit. 
.Signal Corps unit. 
One squad. Company A, 48th Infantry. 
Ist Platoon, Company A, 48th Infantry. 
Light Machine-Gun section, Company A, 
48th Infantry. 
Machine-Gun Platoon, caliber .30. 
Company D, 48th Infantry. 
.Troop A, I6th Cavalry. 
Special Weapons Troop, 16th Cavalry. 
Machine-Gun Troop, caliber .so 
16th Cavalry. 
Company A, Ist Armored Regiment (L). 
Battery B, sth Field Artillery. 
Battery B, 104 th Coast Artillery (A A). 
Battery B, 68th Field Artillery(Armored). 
2d Battalion, 48th Infantry. 
,7th Observation Squadron. 
6th Quartermaster Regiment. 
Command Post, Bth Field Artillery. 
Medical unit in operation. 
Area occupied by Company A, 48th Infantry. 
Figure G2.—Military symbols—Continued. CHAPTER 13 
SECURITY AND PROTECTION 
Section I. General 217-220 
11. Security of individuals 221-223 
111. Security of small units 229—236 
Paragraphs 
Section I 
GENERAL 
n 217. Most of the people you know in civil life probably 
make an effort at some time or other to save money. They 
may do this in various ways, such as putting it in the bank, 
investing in stocks or real estate, or buying different kinds of 
insurance. With money in the bank and insurance against 
accident, fire, or death they are relieved of worry as to what 
will happen to them or their families in case they should 
lose their jobs or suffer other misfortune. Their savings, in- 
vestments, or1 insurance are their protection against the 
uncertainties of the future. 
□ 218. You are also familiar with the police and fire depart- 
ments in your city or town. They are provided to protect 
you and your fellow citizens from the dangers of fire or the 
acts of dishonest persons. In many homes or farms that are 
beyond the city limits, watch dogs serve the same purpose. 
□ 219. All of these things give you, your family, and friends 
a feeling of safety. They relieve you of anxiety or worry and 
make you feel secure in the knowledge that misfortune cannot 
take you by surprise, for you are prepared to meet it. 
□ 220. Security in the Army is exactly the same thing except 
that instead of protection against fire, theft, or loss of a job 
we protect ourselves against the actions of the enemy. Each 
individual soldier and each organization take measures to 
prevent the enemy from taking them by surprise. No matter 
how thorough these measures seem to be, however, no indi- 
vidual cr organization can ever afford to dismiss completely 
167 220-222 
soldier’s handbook 
the possibility of unforeseen action by the enemy. On the 
other hand, if the security measures have been as carefully 
planned as possible, we are relieved of a great deal of anxiety 
and worry. We feel confident that we will be warned in 
sufficient time to take the necessary action before the enemy 
can seriously annoy us or interfere with our movements. 
Thus we are able to give the greater part of our efforts to the 
main job. When we can do this we are providing for our 
“freedom of action.” 
Section n 
SECURITY OP INDIVIDUALS 
■ 221. a. The first thing for you to remember is that in a 
campaign security is always necessary. This is true whether 
you are resting, marching, or actually fighting. You must 
always be on the alert for the movements or actions of the 
enemy, for the sooner you see them and give a warning the 
better chance you and your commander will have to protect 
yourselves and retain your freedom of action. 
b. During combat you may be required to serve as a scout, 
observer, sentinel, listener, sniper, messenger, or a member of 
a patrol. You may have to move about on the battlefield and 
work your way close to the enemy both by daylight and by 
darkness. In order to follow directions and report what you 
see, you must be able to recognize and use the military terms 
for different features cf the terrain, such as valley, gentle 
slope, ravine, cut, and others. The terms which you will use 
most often are shown in figure 63. 
c. Before you can be expected to help provide security for 
your organization, however, you must first know how to pro- 
vide for your own security and protection. There are two 
ways in which you do this; the first is by learning how to 
move and remain concealed, or protected, from enemy obser- 
vation and fire by making use of the ground; the second way 
is by the proper use of your weapons and equipment. 
■ 222. Conduct of Individuals.—a. In whatever arm or service 
you may be you must have a knowledge of the proper use of 
cover and concealment. You can never know when you may 
find yourself in a situation where you will have to apply this soldier’s handbook 
222 
LEFT BANK 
ABRUPT 
SLOPE 
RIGfT 
BANK 
BLUFF 
CLIFF 
LAST THINS 
VISIBLE IS 
SKY LINE 
OR HORIZON 
Figure 63.—Military features of terrain. 
CHEST 
OF 
RIDGE 
ROAD 
FORK 
RAVINE 
ROAD JUNCTION 
saddle 
FILLS 
ROAD 
CENTER 
CULVERT 
DRAW 
PEAK 
CUT 
GENTLE 
SLOPE 
CROSS ROAD 
CLEARING 
VALLEY 
169 222 
soldier’s handbook 
knowledge in order to save your life. In the military sense, 
to be “concealed” means to be hidden from view, but not nec- 
essarily protected from enemy fire. Concealment affords 
protection only when the enemy does not know that the 
terrain feature is occupied. “Cover,” on the other hand, 
means that you are both concealed and protected against 
enemy fire. 
b. Concealment may be provided by a bush or tall grass; 
cover may be a trench, fox hole, a building, an air-raid 
shelter, an armored vehicle, or the side of a hill away from 
the enemy. 
c. are provided with an olive-drab uniform because 
that color blends in with the colors of nature and is difficult 
to see even at a short distance. If there is not sufficient 
natural concealment at hand, you can still further increase 
the concealment which your uniform affords you by using 
leaves, grass, nets, sacking, cr other material which may 
be at hand. No piece of your equipment should glisten in 
the sun. When the ground is covered with snow concealment 
may be provided by wearing a cape or jacket of white 
sheeting. 
d. In observing, take the position which will most reduce 
your exposure to enemy view. Whenever possible this should 
be the prene position. Keep off the skyline and avoid taking 
cover behind single trees and bushes which stand out against 
the skyline or are in sharp contrast to the surrounding ter- 
rain. When observing from woods or a building, keep back 
in the shadows (figs. 64 and 65). You should look and fire 
around the right side of trees or other concealment. 
e. When in the open, lie motionless with your body stretched 
out flat against the ground. To observe, lift your head slowly 
and steadily. Hostile eyes may see abrupt and quick move- 
ments. 
/. If you must move to a new position for better observation, 
select your route carefully before you start. If your route car- 
ries you over open ground, spring up, run at top speed with 
body bent low to your next cover, and remain motionless 
(fig. 66). 
170 soldier’s handbook 
222 
CORRECT OBSERVING 
POSITION 
PRONE AROUND 
RIGHT SIDE CF TREE 
FROM A DITCH OBSERVE 
OVER BROKEN EDGE 
WITH BACKGROUND 
OBSERVE THRU BUSH 
IN PRONE POSITION 
OBSERVE PRONE 
UNDER CROSS BAR 
OF FENCE 
OBSERVE PRONE AROUND 
RIGHT SIDE OF ROCK 
OBSERVE OVER A CREST AT A 
POINT WHERE IT IS BROKEN OR GRASSY 
Figure 64.—Correct use of cover. 
171 £22 
soldier’s handbook 
g. If a wall or hedge is available, move behind it, keeping 
well out of sight. If you have a slight rise of ground between 
you and the enemy, crawl with all parts of your body close 
to the ground. 
h. Before starting toward a new position, pick out those 
places around you where the enemy may be located and then 
TREES 
CHOOSE A TREE WITH A 
BACKGROWND AND WITH 
THE TRUNK SCREENED 
FROM OBSERVATION 
THUS AVOIDING EXPOSURE 
WHILE CLIMBING. HUG 
TRUNK WHILE OBSERVING 
IN OBSERVING FROM A 
DOOR OR WINDOW STAY 
WELL BACK IN SHADOWS 
OF THE ROOM 
Figure C 5 positions, showing correct occupation. 
move as though you were being watched from these places. 
Observe the new position closely to see that an enemy is net 
concealed there. In searching an area look first at the ground 
nearest you. Look carefully at every place that may afford 
an enemy concealment. Search a narrow strip close to you 
from right to left parallel to your front. Then search a second 
172 soldier’s handbook 
222 
strip a little farther away but overlapping the first. Keep 
this up until the entire area is carefully covered (fig. 67). 
FROM A PLACE OF CONCEALMENT 
THE SCOUT OBSERVES POSITION 
FOR SIGNS OF HOSTILE OCCUPATION 
THEN HE APPROACHES IT BY 
A COVERED ROUTE 
Figure 66.—Method of approaching an observing position. 
i. Know where you are at all times and do not become lost 
or confused as to the direction of your own troops. Remember 
173 222 
soldier’s handbook 
all that you see, and report exactly what you have seen when 
you rejoin your organization. 
j. If your duties require you to move close to the enemy 
lines at night make sure that no piece of your equipment will 
Figure 67.—Method of searching ground. 
glisten in the light of a flare, or make a jingle or other telltale 
noise when you move. Cover the luminous dial of your watch. 
k. In movement at night it is just as important as in the 
daytime to keep off the skyline and make use of shadows. If 
you are able to creep, crawl, and cross wire silently you will 
174 soldier’s handbook 
222 
make good progress at night, as you will be unseen. You must 
learn to distinguish different types of noises such as men dig- 
ging with shovels, cutting wire, and walking. Also the sounds 
made by helmets and equipment when struck by wire and 
brush. Stop often and listen. 
I. If you hear the sound of a flare, drop to the ground and 
remain motionless before the flare bursts. If you look at a 
bursting flare you will be blinded momentarily. If possible, 
inspect by day the area you will move over at night. Select 
your route out and back, and carefully note all features of the 
terrain that will assist in guiding you at night. Take ad- 
vantage of any sound, such as firing or wind, to cover the 
noise of your movement and move boldly. Consider all people 
or sounds beyond your own lines as hostile. 
772. During combat if you should be wounded and able to 
walk, report to your commander, turn over your ammunition, 
and leave the battlefield alone. Unless you have been de- 
tailed for that purpose, do not carry wounded men to the 
rear without a written order from an officer. That duty will 
be performed by medical or specially detailed personnel. 
n. If you become separated from your own unit, report to 
the commander of the nearest organization and fight with it 
until the action is over. Then ask for a written statement 
that you were present with the organization and present it to 
your unit commander when you rejoin. 
o. If you should be made a prisoner remember that by the 
international rules of warfare you are required to give only 
your name, grade, and serial number. Answer no other ques- 
tions and do not allow yourself to be frightened by threats 
into giving any information. Any facts about our troops or 
equipment may be of great interest to the enemy and result 
in defeat to the Army and death to your comrades. Do not 
give false answers to questions, as they are dangerous; merely 
refuse to answer. 
p. Do not take into combat letters, diaries, or other written 
papers. If maps or documents have been given to you, de- 
stroy them if it appears that you cannot escape capture. 
o. Remember that acts of violence against peaceful civilians 
and the damaging or looting of property are forbidden. They 
are punishable by trial before a military court. Prisoners 
175 222-223 
soldier’s handbook 
and enemy wounded are not to be mistreated nor is their 
property to be taken from them. If civilians adopt hostile 
acts against you, force may be used to resist them. 
H 223. Sentinels.—a. A sentinel may be posted by a unit to 
insure its safety or readiness for action, or he may be a part 
of a security detachment sent out to protect a larger body. 
If you should be posted as a sentinel, you must be on the job 
every minute you are on post. You should have the follow- 
ing information, obtained from the person who posted you: 
(1) Direction and probable route of approach of the enemy. 
(2) Sector you are required to watch. 
(3) Names of terrain features of military importance 
within sight (villages, roads, streams). 
(4) Location of the nearest security detachments on the 
flanks and the means of communicating with them; number 
and location of your own outguard or security detachment, 
its support, and the routes to them. 
(5) Whether patrols or other friendly troops are operating 
to your front. If so, any signs or signals of recognition or 
other means by which you can identify them, especially at 
night. 
(6) Other special signals. 
(7) Instructions concerning challenging. 
(8) What you will do in case of attack. 
b. If practicable, you will be provided with field glasses and 
a means of signaling. You should place yourself where you 
can see your assigned sector at all times and not be seen by 
the enemy. If possible, in the daytime you should also be 
able to see the sentinels on your flanks. A position in a tree 
may be just what you want. If you see signs of the enemy, 
notify your commander at once. In the daytime you should 
let pass only officers, noncommissioned officers, and detach- 
ments that you recognize. Stop all you do not recognize and 
call your commander, who will make the necessary examina- 
tion of their passes. At night when persons approach your 
post halt them and call your commander. When halting 
anyone keep him covered. If a person fails to stop at your 
third command to halt, or attempts to escape or attack you, 
shoot him. If the enemy attacks or there is other great 
176 soldier’s handbook 
223-225 
danger, give the alarm by firing rapidly. You do not need 
to challenge if you are certain you have recognized the enemy. 
If deserters or a small hostile party displaying a white flag 
approach, make them lay down their arms; call your com- 
mander. Pass on to the sentinel who relieves you all infor- 
mation and instructions relating to your post. (Fig. 68.) 
H 224. Messengers.—At any time during active operations you 
may be called upon to deliver a message. It is your duty to 
deliver it in the shortest time possible. If you should delay, It 
may mean the defeat or capture of your unit. Before start- 
ing out repeat back the message, if it is an oral one, to the per- 
son who gave it to you in order to fix it firmly in your mind. 
Ask questions about any points that are not clear and be sure 
that you thoroughly understand what is expected of you. Next, 
locate yourself on the ground and map, if you have one, and 
select land marks to help you find your way. In order to ac- 
complish your mission it will generally be necessary for you to 
take full advantage of the concealment afforded by the ground, 
as has been explained in paragraph 222, Be especially careful 
not to make careless movements which would enable the 
enemy to locate the station sending the message or the one 
receiving it. By using different routes in entering and leaving 
message centers and command posts you will avoid marking 
out paths which can easily be seen from the air. If necessary, 
ask any troops you pass the whereabouts of the person or 
headquarters for whom your message is intended. If you 
should be delayed or lest, show or explain your message to an 
officer and ask his advice. Any information of importance 
you may have obtained along your route should be reported 
to the person to whom you are delivering the message. Be 
sure that you explain to him what you have seen and heard 
yourself and what has been told you by someone else. After 
delivering your message and before returning, ask if there 
are any messages or orders to be taken back. Upon your 
return to the place from which you started report that you 
have accomplished your mission. 
■ 225. Connecting Pile.—Connection between the different 
parts of a marching column or between the detachments of 
177 Figure 68.—Sentinel on duty. soldier’s handbook 
225-226 
a unit is maintained by connecting files. In a marching 
column a connecting file usually consists of two men. One 
keeps in touch with the element in front, the other with 
the rear. They halt only when the element in front halts or 
upon signals from the rear. They repeat signals from front 
to rear. The distance between connecting files is usually 
about 100 yards by day. At night, or when there is poor 
visibility, the distance is decreased to the limit of visibility. 
If you are a connecting file the principal thing to remember 
is to regulate your movement so that you can always see the 
other connecting file as well as the groups ahead or in rear 
of you. You should see that the element following takes the 
correct road. This will require especial care in turning off a 
road in forests, towns, or villages, and in darkness or fog. 
□ 226. Antiaircraft Security and Protection.—a. As long as 
the enemy has any combat aircraft which will fly, our troops 
may expect to be attacked from the air. To provide security 
against such attacks each ground unit establishes antiaircraft 
lookouts to watch for enemy airplanes and warn the troops. 
These lookouts are provided on the march, in shelter, and in 
combat. They may remain at one post, march abreast of the 
marching unit, or move from one post to another by motor 
vehicles. If you are detailed on this duty you should observe in 
every direction, and especially that from which attacks are to 
be expected. The direction of the sun, or of hills, woods, or 
other cover which might screen low-flying attacks until they 
are close to your unit is particularly dangerous. Antiaircraft 
lookouts usually work in pairs and relieve each other at in- 
tervals of not more than 15 minutes. They are equipped with 
field glasses and sun glasses and instructed as to the alarm 
signal to be used. They are trained to recognize hostile as 
well as friendly airplanes. The alarm is given as soon as 
low-flying airplanes are seen which are not positively iden- 
tified as friendly. Observers stationed at our antiaircraft 
weapons and at command and observation posts will be on 
the watch for signals from the antiaircraft lookouts. 
b. In case of a daylight air attack, never attempt to escape 
by running. The plane probably has not seen you before but 
is sure to see you when you run. Your best protection is to lie 
flat on the ground. A ditch, shellhole, depression, or shadows 
179 226-227 
soldier’s handbook 
along the road will give you good protection. When attacked 
from low altitudes, unless you have received definite orders 
not to fire, every soldier should fire on the enemy planes with 
rifle, automatic rifle, and machine guns. This will cause the 
enemy airplanes to keep above the range of small arms fire. 
c. Dense woods provide complete concealment from aircraft 
and it is doubtful that you will be seen even in sparse woods 
provided you do not move around. If you are to be in the 
open for some time you can conceal yourself by pulling 
branches or bushes over you, which will blend with the land- 
scape, and by lying still. 
d. At night enemy airplanes may drop flares to light up the 
ground. When a flare is first dropped, it glows for about a 
second and then burns brightly. When you see that a flare 
has been dropped, stop where you are and remain motionless 
until it has burned out. 
■ 227. Antitank Security and Protection.—a. To give warn- 
ing of the approach of enemy tanks or armored vehicles, anti- 
tank lookouts are provided. Sometimes the same lookouts will 
watch for enemy aircraft as well as tanks and armored ve- 
hicles. Prearranged sound and visual signals are used to warn 
our troops. The approach of tanks may be suspected by the 
noise of their motors and tracks or by unusual columns of dust. 
When your unit is at a distance from where the enemy is 
known to be, the probable approach of tanks or armored 
vehicles will be over roads. When you are close to the enemy, 
however, the entire area to your front must be watched. 
b. For the same reason that you should not run from an 
airplane attack do not run from an attack by enemy tanks or 
armored vehicles. You can’t run fast enough to get away 
from them and they are sure to see you and have a much 
better shot at you than if you remained still. If you are with 
your unit, upon seeing or hearing the antitank warning signal, 
await orders from your commander. 
c. If you are alone, your best protection from vehicles of 
this kind is to take advantage of natural obstacles that they 
cannot cross. These are deep streams, canals, or other bodies 
of water, marshes or boggy ground, deep ditches or ravines, 
thick, heavy woods, stump land, and ground littered with 
good sized boulders. 
180 soldier’s handbook 
227-228 
d. You will also be safe from these vehicles in a trench or 
“fox hole” if you get down below the surface of the ground 
and allow the tank to pass over you. If you get a chance to 
shoot at the tank, aim at the vision slots or other openings 
but withhold your fire until the vehicle is at close range. If 
the belly of the tank is exposed you have a good chance of 
shooting through it with your .30 caliber armor piercing am- 
munition. Hand grenades have been used to good effect 
against armored vehicles, as well as bottles of gasoline which 
will break on the vehicle and set it afire. Above all, remem- 
ber that armored vehicles can be stopped and destroyed, so 
don’t be panicky when they approach your position. 
H 228. Protection Against Gas.—a. Gas is another weapon 
which the enemy may use on the battlefield to gain surprise. 
Your security against being surprised is to learn to know 
when gas attacks are being made and how to use your gas 
mask. If you can do this, act promptly and keep cool, you 
have nothing to fear from a gas attack. 
h. The enemy may use gas in one of the following ways: 
(1) Prom candles and cylinders. You can tell these by the 
hissing sound of the escaping gas and during daylight by the 
cloud of gas itself. 
(2) From gas projectors and artillery and mortar shells. 
Projector attacks make a big explosion, a brilliant flash, and 
a large cloud of smoke and dust. Artillery and mortar shells 
filled with gas sound almost like duds when they explode. 
Usually a thin haze or mist surrounds the burst for a few 
moments. 
(3) From airplanes and tanks. The airplane bomb filled 
with gas also sounds like a dud when it explodes. If the gas 
is sprayed from the airplane or tank it can usually be seen. 
(4) Prom bulk containers and chemical land mines, placed 
in position and exploded by electricity or by contact fuze. 
c. You should remember the following rules as your 
security against gas: 
(1) Carry nothing in your gas mask carrier but your mask. 
(2) Prevent damage to your gas mask by handling it care- 
fully. 
(3) Keep your gas; mask. You may need’ it at any time, 
and it may save your life. 
181 228 
soldier’s handbook 
(4) Give a gas alarm only when gas is present. 
(5) Hold your breath after the gas alarm is given until 
you are sure that your mask is well adjusted to your face 
and that you have cleared the face piece of gas by blowing 
vigorously into it while holding the outlet valve. 
(6) Keep your gas mask on until permission to remove it is 
given by an officer or a gas noncommissioned officer. 
(7) Do not enter a dugout during or immediately after a 
gas attack. 
(8) During or immediately after a gas attack keep your 
mask on, even if in a gasproof dugout. 
(9) Remain quiet and avoid unnecessary moving around 
during a gas attack. 
(10) Keep cool, and remember your protective equipment 
will save you if properly used. 
(11) Remember that the enemy uses many different kinds 
of gases, sometimes one kind at a time, and sometimes mixed 
with other chemical agents, smoke, or high explosive. 
(12) Remember that clothing which has been in contact 
with mustard gas should be removed as soon as posable. 
(13) Use gloves to remove another man’s clothing or to 
handle equipment that has come in contact with mustard 
gas. 
(14) Remember that mustard gas remains in an area for 
days. 
(15) Avoid all areas in which there has been mustard gas. 
If your duties require you to go into such an area, remain 
as short a time as possible even though you are wearing 
protective clothing and a gas mask. 
(16) Remember that the best conditions for a gas attack 
are diming a calm, in foggy or cloudy weather, a drizzling 
rain, and at night. Be on the alert. 
(17) Avoid drinking water or eating food that has been 
subjected to a gas attack. 
(18) Remember that all gas cases require: first, rest; sec- 
ond, warmth; third, fresh air. 
(19) If gassed, do not talk, walk, or move about. 
(20) Do not bandage the eyes of a gassed case. It is harm- 
ful and may result in blindness. 
182 soldier’s handbook 
229-231 
Section 111 
SECURITY OP SMALL UNITS 
■ 229. For your commander to use his troops successfully he 
must first know where the enemy is and what he is doing. 
Without this information your commander is like a man try- 
ing to feel his way in the dark. He cannot know how to plan 
his attack to defeat the enemy, for he does not know where he 
will meet him. Nor does he know at what moment, or from 
what direction, the enemy may attack him and take him by 
surprise. 
■ 230. You may be detailed as a member of a detachment sent 
out to provide security for a larger body of troops. These de- 
tachments have different names which indicate whether the 
main body is resting, marching, or fighting and what the se- 
curity detachment is doing. No matter what they are called, 
always remember that the principal mission of every security 
detachment is to prevent the main body from being surprised. 
They do this by finding out where the enemy is and what he is 
doing by giving warning of the enemy’s approach, and by 
delaying him so that the main force can get ready to fight. 
They are the eyes and ears of the commander. They get back 
to him the information he needs to know so quickly that he 
will have plenty of time to make or change his plans. Another 
important thing to remember is, no matter how small the unit 
may be it always provides for its own security even though 
this security may consist of only one or two men. 
■ 231. Scouts.—a. The smallest security detachment is the 
scout. The scout is a soldier whose duty it is to see what the 
enemy is doing without being seen, and to hear the enemy 
without being heard. The scout must be intelligent, have a 
strong body, great endurance, keen eyesight, delicate hearing, 
and an excellent memory, 
b. As a scout your commander may use you in all types of 
combat operations. When your organization is in camp or 
bivouac, scouts are sent out from the outpost to gain informa- 
tion of the enemy, to prevent his scouts from gaining infor- 
mation of your organization, or both. When your organiza- 
183 soldier’s handbook 
tion is on the march, scouts perform important duties with 
the advance, flank, and rear guards by discovering hostile 
troops and promptly sending this information back so that 
your own commander will not be surprised. In movements by 
night or in dense woods, scouts serve as guides. 
c. As your unit moves forward to the attack, scouts precede 
it and keep the proper direction for it to follow; they investi- 
gate danger areas before the unit crosses them, and select 
locations where it will be protected from enemy fire. During 
the progress of the attack they also protect your unit from 
surprise fire or counterattack by the enemy; they select and 
occupy firing positions and point out enemy targets. 
d. When their organization is on the defense, scouts serve 
as lookouts, observers, listeners, and snipers. They may 
serve as members of patrols to enter the enemy lines, both 
by day and night, to get information of the enemy. They 
drive off enemy scouts and patrols who are trying to do the 
same thing. 
e. A trained scout will be able to see and hear things that 
the average soldier does not. You must be able to pick up in- 
distinct and motionless objects as well as moving ones. Long 
periods of painstaking search are often required before the 
position of a hostile soldier is located. As a scout you will 
conceal yourself as has been described in the preceding sec- 
tion, but as you will be “on your own” you will have greater 
freedom of movement. 
/. Scouts usually work in pairs, with each scout having the 
utmost confidence in the ability of his fellow scout. Train 
with your partner and make a buddy of him so that each 
of you know what the other will do under any circumstances. 
Scouts always work in pairs when scouting in front of their 
organization in the advance. They move ahead of their or- 
ganization as ordered by the commander. Here their duty 
will be to cause hostile riflemen and machine gunners to open 
fire and disclose their position, and to overcome resistance 
from small hostile outposts and patrols (fig. 69). 
g. As you scout in front of your advancing unit, pick out 
probable positions that may conceal enemy machine guns 
or rifle groups. When you signal that these positions are 
184 soldier’s handbook 
231 
RUNNERS CONNECTING UP THE SCOUTS WITH 
THE PLATOON LEADER 
Figure 69.—Position of scouts in advance. 
273916°—41 7 
185 231-232 
soldier’s handbook 
clear your unit will advance by bounds and you should move 
forward for further reconnaissance. 
h. Your distance in front of your organization varies with 
the ground and position of the enemy. In approaching houses, 
woods, and villages, one scout of each pair covers while one 
reconnoiters (fig. 70). 
i. When the enemy opens fire, stop, seek cover, and deter- 
mine where the fire is coming from. Scouts open fire with 
tracer ammunition to show to their leader the position of the 
enemy. 
j. Scouts must be alert for intervals or gaps in the enemy 
line. When you discover them, push in, take up a position 
from which flanking fire may be brought to bear on the hostile 
position, then either you or your fellow scout notify your 
leader at once. 
k. You can see that if you are appointed a scout a great deal 
will depend upon how well you perform your duties. You 
must always remember why the commander sent you out and 
what he wants you to do. That is your “mission.” Sometimes 
this will require a great deal of courage on your part and you 
may have to try out several of different plans until one of them 
works. You will be “on your own” and often will find yourself 
in a situation which neither you nor your commander could 
have thought of in advance. But if you remember your “mis- 
sion” at this time, and just what information your commander 
is anxiously waiting to receive from you, you will succeed. 
■ 232. Patrols.—a. General.—The squad or a part of a squad 
often acts as a patrol. Patrols are assigned either recon- 
naissance or security as their primary mission. 
(1) Reconnaissance patrols are used primarily to get in- 
formation, maintain contact with the enemy, or observe 
points or areas. They do not fight unless they must in order 
to accomplish their task. They move so as best to do their 
job; they are not bound by either position or distance to the 
unit from which they were sent out. 
(2) Security patrols provide security for a larger force. 
Their mission often will require them to fight. They must 
regulate their movements on the force or unit they are 
protecting. 
186 soldier’s handbook 
232 
WITH PLATOON IN WOODS 
SCOUTS REACH OPEN 
AND SEE HOUSE AHEAD. 
THEY SIGNAL HALT. 
MEANING THAT THE 
PLATOON SHOULD NOT 
ADVANCE BEYOND THIS 
POINT. RECONNAISSANCE 
SHOWS HOUSE TO BE 
CLEAR. SCOUTS SIGNAL 
FORWARD AND PROCEED 
CROSSING OPEN SPACE 
SCOUT SEES POSITION 
FROM WHICH MACHINE 
GUN MAY SWEEP THIS 
AREA. HE SIGNALS 
DOUBLE TIME AND 
POINTS TO THE MG 
POSITION. MEANING 
THIS AREA IN DANGER. 
FROM THAT POINT 
PLATOON SHOULD 
HURRY ACROSS 
SCOUT RECONNOITERS 
FOR A SHORT DISTANCE 
INTO WOODS. FINDING 
EDGE OF WOODS TO 
BE UNOCCUPIED. A 
SCOUT RETURNS TO 
EDGE OF WOODS AND 
SIGNALS ■'FORWARD". 
THEN BOTH ENTER 
WOODS AND WAIT FOR 
PLATOON TO CLOSE UP 
Figure 70.—Gonduct of scouts during advance. 
187 232 
soldier’s handbook 
(3) Patrols executing missions which will probably call for 
combat are given the means and the strength to enable them 
to engage in combat. 
b. Reconnaissance patrols.—(l) Reconnaissance patrols 
are usually small, consisting of a leader and two or three 
men. They avoid unnecessary combat and accomplish their 
missions by stealth. 
(2) The patrol leader is given the enemy situation and 
our own situation insofar as he needs to know them. He is 
given a definite job to do; he is told the general routes to be 
followed, the friendly troops through which he will pass, the 
time of return, and the place where messages are to be sent or 
the patrol is to report. 
(3) Before starting out the patrol leader studies the map 
and the terrain and selects a suitable route. He appoints 
alternate leaders, gives the other members of the patrol care- 
ful instructions about the task the patrol has to perform, 
assigns individual tasks, points out the route on the map 
and on the ground, arranges special signals, and designates 
an assembly point if the patrol is forced to separate. He 
makes sure that all members of the patrol know their jobs 
and checks to see that the arms and equipment are so carried 
that they will not glisten or rattle. The members of the 
patrol do not carry written matter which might be of value 
to the enemy if they are captured. 
(4) All must clearly understand that in event of a fight 
wounded comrades are not abandoned but brought in with 
the patrol, whenever possible. 
(5) All patrols provide for a point, flank protection, and 
a get-away man, who must always be able to return to his 
commander no matter what may happen to the remainder of 
the patrol. When a patrol is at a halt for any reason it 
must provide itself with all around protection (fig. 71). 
(6) When moving in open country near the enemy, the 
patrol should pick its next stopping place before each ad- 
vance, Moves should be made by one man at a time and at 
top speed. Before crossing a skyline one man should go to 
a point where the skyline is broken and observe, the rest of 
the patrol covering his advance. When he signals “forward" soldier’s handbook 
232 
the way is clear and the remainder of the patrol comes up 
(fig. 72). 
RIGHT FLANK 
LEFT FLANK 
Figure 71.—Distribution of patrol halted in observation. 
(7) Patrols should avoid enclosures and villages if possi- 
ble. If it is necessary to pass through villages or to patrol 
189 232 
soldier’s handbook 
ONE MAN APPROACHES 
UNDER COVER OTHERS 
ARE IN POSITION READY 
TO OPEN FIRE IF 
NECESSARY 
THE PATROL CROSSES 
ONE MAN AT A TIME. 
OTHERS ARE IN POSITION 
READY TO OPEN FIRE IF 
NECESSARY 
Figure 72.—Method of approaching house; of crossing stream. 
190 soldier’s handbook 
232 
them, great care must be taken, as each house or cellar may 
conceal an enemy. Watch windows, doors, and tops of houses 
closely. Advance slowly and cautiously (fig. 73). 
(8) If a patrol is attacked and must fight, the man who first 
notes the danger calls out “Front,” “Right,” “Left,” or “Rear.” 
All members face toward the man attacked. The men on 
the flanks advance a short distance straight ahead and then 
close on the enemy from the flanks. The patrol leader and 
the men with him rush the enemy. During the combat, the 
members of the patrol repeat their recognition signals. If 
necessary, the leader designates a man near him to stay out 
of the fight. 
(9) The patrol leader decides whether information gained 
will be sent back at once by messenger or reported on the 
return of the patrol. He alone is authorized to talk to, or 
arrest civilians or to seize telegrams and mail matter. 
Patrols do not allow civilians to pass through or precede 
them. 
(10) An example of a message which you, as a patrol 
leader, might send back is shown in figure 74. After writ- 
ing the message you would point out to the messenger who 
will carry it the location of the stone fence, woods, and 
machine guns and tell him your intentions. The sketch 
can be made quickly and requires no special ability. It con- 
tains all the information that is needed but no unnecessary 
information. If the commanding officer of Company A 
wants to know what you are going to do, he will ask the 
messenger. The advantage of this lies in the fact that, 
should the messenger and the message be captured by an 
enemy patrol, there is nothing in the message to tell them 
where Corporal Jones is now. To write “squad will remain 
at B” invites capture. 
(11) A soldier who is a good individual scout will ordi- 
narily be a good member of a patrol. However, it must 
be remembered that as a member of a patrol you must 
obey the signals or commands of the designated leader in- 
stantly and without fail. You are not then scouting “on 
your own.” 
(12) Since many night patrols are for the purpose of cap- 
turing prisoners and executing tasks which may require 
191 232 
soldier’s handbook 
Figure 73.—Formation of patrol passing through village. 
192 soldier’s handbook 
232 
combat, the patrol should rehearse plans for night combat 
and laying ambushes until it reaches a high state of effi- 
ciency. Only through repeated rehearsals and training will 
each member of the patrol learn to do his part unhesitat- 
ingly and correctly, and thus gain confidence in the ability 
of the patrol as a unit (fig. 75). Failure to do this will 
sooner or later result in heavy losses in the patrols. 
These spoces for message center only 
Time Filed 
MS6CEN NO 
MESSAGE 
How Sent 
No 2 
Dote 20 Dec. 40 
To C O. Co. A. 
MG 
*■*7s 
stone fence 
moods 
/. Enemy machine gun firing near 
stone fence■ See one gun at MG 
500 
2 Patrol now at B. 
wheat field 
3. Runner will report my future 
movements 
Leader Patrol No! 
OFFICIAL DESIGNATION OF SENDER |TIME SIGNED 
9=20 A 
Signature and Grade of writer 
Jones, Gorp •/. 
Figure 74.—Example of message. 
C. Security patrols.—(l) A squad or a part of a squad may 
act as a point (of the advance guard or rear guard) or as 
a flank patrol of a force on the march or in combat. 
193 232 
soldier’s handbook 
(2) Point of advance guard.—The point of an advance 
guard is a security patrol. It moves along the route of 
march and prevents an enemy on or near the route of 
march from opening surprise fire on the troops in rear. 
Behind the point comes the advance party. The distance 
between them will vary with the kind of terrain and whether 
it is day or night, but usually the point will not precede the 
advance party by more than 300 yards. As a member of 
the point you will find that it is so arranged as best to let 
the leader control it, to make it a poor target for enemy 
fire, and to permit all members to fire quickly to the front 
or either flank. It frequently marches on both sides of the 
road. It fires on all hostile forces within effective range. 
When unable to drive off the enemy, it holds its position 
and covers the action of the advance party. The presence 
of a distant enemy beyond effective rifle range is reported 
by signal. The point observes toward the front and flanks 
but does not reconnoiter on the flanks of the route of march. 
When the column halts, the point sends forward one or more 
observers. 
(3) Point of rear guard.—As a member of a rear point 
you are assisting in protecting the rear of your marching 
column. The formation of the rear point is similar to that 
of the point of an advance guard. However, as a member 
of a rear point you stop to fire only when the enemy 
threatens to interfere with the march. No other troops 
will move to your assistance, but when the enemy presses 
closely, other troops will take up firing positions in rear to 
cover you. When you are forced back, withdraw to a flank 
so that the troops behind you can fire into the enemy. 
(4) Flank patrol.—(a) A flank patrol is a security patrol. 
Flank patrols operate in one of two ways; either they go 
to a designated place, remain there for a specified time, and 
there rejoin the column, or they march along a designated 
route. They report, by signal or messenger, enemy forces 
they observe. 
(b) A flank patrol of a column on the march moves so 
that it can protect the column against hostile small-arms 
fire at mid ranges (300 to 600 yards). 
194 soldier’s handbook 
232 
PAIRS OF SCOUTS ATTACK 
PREVIOUSLY DESIGNATED 
MEMBERS OF THE ENEMY 
PATROL BY RUNNING IN 
UPON THEM FROM BEHIND. 
A PAIR OF HEN WITH 
BROWNING AUTOMATIC RIFLES 
ARE PLACED ON EACH FLANK 
NEAR END OF AMBUSH SO THAT 
THEY CAN COVER ITS FLANKS. 
Figure 75.—Night ambush. 
195 232-233 
soldier’s handbook 
(c) In combat the flank of the unit to which you belong 
may become exposed. In such a situation flank security 
patrols are sent out to protect the exposed flank. Not only 
do these patrols report observed hostile forces and their 
movements but they also report the movements of friendly 
forces which they can see. 
■ 233. Security at Halt.—a. Detachments of troops detailed 
to protect a body of troops at rest or not on the march are 
called outposts. The general purposes of an outpost are to 
get information, to observe places where the enemy might 
sneak up on the main body, and to fight off enemy troops 
coming toward your position. In particular the outpost must 
protect the main body so the troops can rest, or work undis- 
turbed, and in case of attack hold the enemy off long enough 
so that the main body can get ready to fight. If you are a 
sentinel on outpost duty you must be on the job every minute 
you are on post, but you must avoid unnecessarily alarming 
the command. 
h. For an organization the size of a company, troop, or 
battery the outpost need be only a few sentinels and patrols. 
In a larger organization a larger and more elaborate outpost 
will be needed. On account of the presence of motorized 
and armored forces in all modern armies, outposts must give 
all around protection to their commands. The part of the 
outpost nearest the enemy is an observation group called an 
outguard. Behind the outguard are more troops in detach- 
ments called supports (figs. 76 and 77). 
c. If you are a member of an outguard, no fires will be 
built or smoking permitted unless you are told you can do so. 
You should avoid loud talking or making other noise. The 
position of each outguard may be entrenched and will be 
concealed. You keep your weapons at hand all the time, and 
do not remove your equipment. Your duties as a sentinel are 
described in the preceding section. 
d. You may be called upon to perform outpost patrol duty. 
Outpost patrols operate either within our lines or beyond our 
lines. Some patrols operate beyond our lines to reconnoiter 
in the direction of the enemy. Other patrols operate within 
our lines in order to keep in touch with the parts of tha 
outpost and check up on the performance of duty on the line 
196 soldier’s handbook 
233 
of outguards. Outpost patrols have at least two men and 
a good leader who, on important tasks, may be an officer. 
The patrols get information of the ground and of where the 
Direction of 
THE ENEMY 
OUTGUARD 
NO. Z 
Outguard 
NO. 1 
OUTGUARD 
NO. 3 
Support 
MAIN BODY 
Figttee 76.—Outpost of small force. 
enemy is and what he is doing. Any ground near the line 
of outguards that might give concealment for hostile troops 
197 233 
soldier’s handbook 
<WrGUABD 
TO SimCW OH tlGfiT 
Figure 77.—Several outguards on. duty. 
OUTCUAtB 
TO SimotT ON LEFT 
OUTOUADO /I?? 
198 soldier’s handbook 
233-234 
is searched frequently by patrols if the enemy could get to 
it without being seen. When you are on patrol duty you 
fire only in self defense or to give the alarm. Patrols and 
reliefs should not move in the open in vicinity of the out- 
guards and so give away the location of the sentinels and 
outguards. 
e. If you have to establish a cavalry outguard, remember 
that your horses must be kept as near at hand as practi- 
cable, This will require careful planning so that they can 
be fed and watered and still be protected from enemy ob- 
servation and fire. 
■ 234. Security on the March.—a. An advance guard is a 
detachment of a body of troops that goes ahead of and pro- 
tects the main body on the march. The chief job of an ad- 
vance guard is to protect the main body against surprise 
attack and drive back small detachments of the enemy. Par- 
ticularly its duties are— 
(l) To guard against surprise and get information by 
patrolling. 
(2) To push back small detachments of the enemy and 
prevent them from observing, firing on, or delaying the main 
body. 
(3) To remove obstacles and make repairs to the road to 
help the steady advance of the column. 
(4) To delay the enemy’s advance in force long enough 
to let the main body get ready to fight. 
(5) When the enemy is found on the defensive to take a 
good position, locate his lines, and protect the main body 
during its preparation for action. 
b. An advance guard provides for its own security and gets 
information by putting out smaller detachments to the front 
and flank. The most advanced part of the advance guard is 
called the point. (Pigs. 78 and 79.) The point is usually a 
squad, or part of a squad. It is really a patrol with a fixed 
mission. 
c. Your part in an advance guard may be as a part of the 
point or one of the other patrols sent out to make sure that 
the enemy does not ambush the main body. 
d. If the point of an advance guard is fired upon, it should 
deploy and try to continue to advance fighting. This is done 
199 234 
soldier’s handbook 
in order that small enemy detachments will not succeed in 
delaying the advance of the main body. Flank patrols assist 
in this, and if the enemy does not fall back they try to locate 
his flanks. If necessary, each part of the advance guard goes 
into action to clear the way for the main body. 
e. A rear guard is a detachment whose job is to protect the 
main body from an attack from the rear. In a retreat it 
fires on and delays in every possible way enemy pursuing 
troops, so that the main body can gain distance from the 
ADVANCE GUARD 
FLANK 
GUARD 
FLANK 
GUARD 
DIRECTION 
OF MARCH 
MAIN BODY 
REAR GUARD 
Figure 78.—Relation of security detachments on march to main 
body. 
enemy. Tire formation of a rear guard is like that of an 
advance guard, reversed. That is, the various parts follow 
the main body instead of going ahead of it. Also the rear 
party follows the support, and the rear point follows the 
rear party. The rear guard makes the most of opportunities 
to block the road and takes up good positions from which 
it can fire on the enemy and make him deploy. The fight is 
not kept up so long that the rear guard will not be able to 
fall back to other positions. (Fig. 80.) 
200 soldier’s handbook 
234 
/. A flank guard is a detachment whose job is to cover the 
flank of a column exposed to enemy attack. It may be placed in 
position to cover the march of the main body or it may march 
generally opposite the main body to protect it. The object of 
the flank guard is to prevent attack of the main body or, if 
this cannot be done, then to delay the enemy long enough so 
that the main body can get ready to fight. The flank guard 
must keep contact with the main body. A flank guard must 
i, then to delay the enemy long enough so 
can get ready to fight. The flank guard 
POINT 
ADVANCE PARTY 
SUPPORT 
* 
DIRECTION 
OF MARCH 
MAIN BODY 
Figtjre 79.—Advance guard of small force. 
provide its own protection and if necessary have its own ad- 
vance guard or rear guard and flank patrols (fig. 78). 
g. (1) When a march is made near the enemy, special meas- 
ures are taken during halts for protection against surprise or 
attack. When the halt is only for a short time (less than a 
half hour), the advance party and support rest along the route 
of march. The point and flank patrols move to positions where 
they can keep a good lookout. If necessary more patrols will 
be sent out from the advance party and support. Antiaircraft 
and antitank lookouts are detailed to watch out for the ap- 
proach of enemy airplanes and tanks or armored vehicles. 
(2) If the halt is longer than a half hour, a march outpost 
will probably be formed, Outguards are sent out to the 
201 234 
soldier’s handbook 
front and flanks, and unless friendly troops are close in the 
rear they will be put out to protect the rear also. The out- 
guards to the front and flanks are furnished by units of the 
advance guard. Outguards to the rear, when necessary, will 
be taken from the rear guard. When the march is to be 
resumed, the various outguards are signalled to close in, and 
when all are back in their march formations the march is 
MAIN BODY 
SUPPORT 
DIRECTION 
OF MARCH 
REAR PARTY 
Figure 80.—Rear guard of small force. 
REAR POINT 
resumed. March outposts watch particularly roads and 
routes of approach leading to the main body for the approach 
of enemy mechanized and motorized detachments. March 
outposts work like other outposts in protecting the main 
force. 
h. All arms of the service follow the same general plan 
for providing security for themselves. In the cavalry, ar- 
mored, or motorized units, however, the distances between 
the security detachments and the main body are greater than 
202 soldier’s handbook 
234-235 
with foot troops because of the greater speed which cavalry, 
armored, and motorized units have. Security elements of 
these rapidly moving forces sometimes advance by bounds, 
much as a scout will do in advancing toward the enemy. 
That is, the point of the advance guard will move rapidly 
forward to some ridge or other favorable terrain feature from 
which it can observe toward the enemy and, if all looks well, 
it signals for the next larger unit to come forward. The 
leader of the point then selects another favorable terrain 
feature and repeats his advance, taking advantage of cover. 
While the point is doing this the next larger detachment in 
rear is prepared to defend the point by firing on any hostile 
element which might seek to stop the advance of the point. 
Sometimes, however, when the advance of the main body is 
very rapid, or during darkness or fog, movements by bounds 
will not be made but a steady rate maintained. 
■ 235. Security While Defending.—a. When your organi- 
zation is defending, security against a surprise attack is pro- 
vided by sentinels, patrols, outguards, outposts, a warning sys- 
tem, and natural and artificial obstacles. The natural obsta- 
cles which provide some protection by making it difficult for 
the enemy to attack are rivers, canals, lakes, marshes or boggy 
ground, ravines, steep mountains, and other difficult parts of 
the terrain. They can all be crossed, however, and must be 
watched and defended. 
b. The artificial obstacles which provide protection are 
trenches and dugouts, barbed wire entanglements, road blocks, 
road craters, traps, and mines. Just as with the natural obsta- 
cles, the enemy can remove or cross artificial obstacles if he is 
not interfered with. The thing to remember is that after a 
natural or artifical obstacle has been selected or put in place it 
should be covered with the fire of your weapons, especially 
machine guns. The obstacles will slow the enemy up. When 
he attempts to remove or cross them your fire will stop him. 
c. (1) There are specially organized units in the Army to 
provide protection against aircraft and armored vehicles. If 
you are assigned to one of these units, you will be given special 
instruction in the use of the weapons. If you are not a member 
of such a unit, however, you should make every effort to pro- 
vide your own security with the weapons and other means 
203 235-236 
soldier’s handbook 
available to you. As was explained before, your best protec- 
tion against low-flying aircraft is concealment, remaining 
quietly in place, and firing on the airplane with all weapons 
unless you have received orders not to fire. 
(2) Even where natural obstacles exist, additional security 
should be provided against armored vehicles by an all around 
protection of artificial obstacles. Tank traps and mines can be 
set out, although this will usually be done by engineers or 
larger troop units. Road blocks are especially effective in 
stopping armored vehicles or slowing them up and making 
them go across country. These may be easily constructed by 
deepening and enlarging shell holes on the road, by felling 
trees or telephone poles, or by putting old automobiles or 
trucks crosswise on the road where the armored vehicles can- 
not get off the road because of steep banks or ditches. The 
value of these obstacles is increased by covering them with 
fire, which will Interfere with the enemy’s attempts to remove 
the obstacles. 
(3) You must be on the alert to prevent enemy sympathizers 
or parachute troops which have been landed behind our lines 
from removing these obstacles. If you are detailed to guard 
an obstacle, never allow any persons to tamper with it or 
remove it unless you are sure of their authority to do so. If 
there is any doubt in your mind, hold them under guard until 
one of your officers or noncommissioned officers arrives. If 
they attempt to attack you or to escape, shoot them. 
■ 236. Security While Attacking.—a. As your unit ap- 
proaches the actual or probable location of the enemy, se- 
curity is provided by covering its advance with scouts. These 
scouts go in advance of the larger units and “comb” the 
ground thoroughly. Their action will make the enemy dis- 
close his position by opening fire before the larger elements 
of your organization have come within his range. As your 
unit comes closer to the enemy’s position additional security 
will be provided by breaking up into smaller units, known as 
squad or platoon columns, or by deploying as skirmishers. 
This increases the readiness for action of your unit by putting 
it into formation from which it can move in any direction 
and cannot be surprised by any action of the enemy. Addi- 
204 soldier’s handbook 
236 
tlonal security is provided by the fire of machine guns and 
other weapons which keep down the enemy’s fire until your 
organization can reach his position and drive him out of it. 
b. If your organization halts during the attack, one or more 
combat outposts are immediately sent out to the front where 
they can screen and protect your organization until it is ready 
to continue the attack. A combat outpost usually operates 
from several alternate positions. If the enemy advances the 
combat outpost opens fire at long range. Upon close approach 
of the attacking troops the combat outpost withdraws. Routes 
cf withdrawal are used which will not interfere with your 
own organization in rear firing at the enemy. 
c. If the battle is interrupted by darkness, combat outposts 
will be promptly established. At night they will be closer to 
your organization than in the daytime. The combat outpost 
will establish listening posts to warn the front line organiza- 
tions of the approach of hostile raiding or attacking parties. 
It will maintain a vigorous reconnaissance during the night in 
order to discover any change in the hostile dispositions, inten- 
tions, or situation. 
d. During battle it may happen that a flank of your organ- 
ization may be exposed. That means that there are no 
friendly troops close to that flank. When this happens a 
flank patrol must be sent out to that flank. Its duties 
are to prevent the enemy from working his way around 
and attacking your exposed flank or rear, or to give due 
warning of such an intention. Such a patrol regulates its 
own movements on that of the unit it is protecting. It may 
remain in one position or, if your organization is advancing, 
it will move rapidly from one position to another. When the 
patrol occupies a position each member selects two locations, 
one from which he can fire to the front or flank and another 
from which he can fire to the flank or rear. The patrol must 
be in constant communication with the unit it is protecting. 
One man is selected who must always be able to escape and get 
back to your organization in case the patrol is captured. In- 
formation of enemy activities or of friendly troops which may 
appear on that flank are reported back to your commander 
as he directs. 
205 CHAPTER 14 
MILITARY SANITATION AND FIRST AID 
Paragraphs 
Section I. Military sanitation 237—252 
11. First aid 253—275 
Section I 
MILITARY SANITATION 
■ 237. Before you entered the Army, you were given a 
thorough physical examination to see that you had no dis- 
ease. Now that you have been accepted in the military service 
it is your duty to our country and yourself to keep well and 
ready for any service. If you will remember and follow the 
few simple rules given below, you will find yourself repaid 
many times. Following these rules, in connection with the 
daily exercise of your military training, will keep you in ex- 
cellent physical condition, and you will return to civil life 
with a better and stronger body than when you entered the 
Army. 
■ 238. If at any time you do not feel perfectly well, or be- 
lieve that you have any disease, go at once to your first ser- 
geant, or the noncommissioned officer in charge of quarters, 
who will send you to a medical officer for examination. 
Never try to treat yourself, as you may not only seriously 
harm yourself, but may also become a source of danger to 
your comrades. The danger of giving a disease to another 
man is usually greatest when the illness is just starting, and 
often before you feel really sick. If you have a cold, a head- 
ache, diarrhea, sore eyes, a rash on your body, or feel feverish, 
you must be examined by a medical officer as soon as possible. 
Many catching diseases begin with these symptoms, so you 
must not wait until you have exposed your comrades before 
seeing a medical officer. You will also usually have a less 
severe illness yourself If you report for a treatment as early 
as possible. 
206 soldier’s handbook 
239-244 
■ 239. Stay away from any person having a disease unless 
it is your duty to take care of him. 
■ 240. An unclean body may be the cause of disease. Take 
a bath at frequent, regular intervals and at least twice a 
week. Pay particular attention to your armpits, the parts 
between the legs, the feet, and under the foreskin. Always 
wash your hands thoroughly before eating and after using 
the toilet, as you may have gotten some disease germs on your 
hands which will get on the food you eat and into your system. 
You are especially likely to get such germs on your hands 
when going to the toilet. If bathing facilities are not available, 
scrub your body frequently with a wet cloth, paying par- 
ticular attention to your armpits, crotch, and feet. 
■ 241. Have your underwear, shirts, and socks washed fre- 
quently and change them at least twice a week. If water is 
not available, crumple up your clothing, shake it well, and 
hang it in the sunlight for at least 2 hours. Be on the lookout 
for body lice and crab lice. If you have a continued itching 
on your body or head, report to a medical officer at once. 
■ 242. When your clothing or shoes get wet, change them 
as soon as possible. Sitting around in wet clothes or with 
wet feet is almost certain to give you a cold or other serious 
illness. 
■ 243. Keep your mouth clean by thoroughly brushing your 
teeth at least twice a day; one brushing should always be 
before going to bed. Brush your teeth on the inside and out- 
side, away from the gums and toward the cutting surfaces of 
the teeth. If particles of food remain between the teeth, they 
should be promptly removed, care being taken not to injure 
the gums. If your teeth are bad, or ache, report to the 
dental officer. 
■ 244. Get into the habit of having your bowels move regu- 
larly once each day at as nearly the same time as possible. 
Always go to the toilet to urinate, or when your bowels move. 
Using the ground for this purpose is a source of great danger 
to everyone. Plies or other insects may alight where you 
have relieved yourself, pick up germs, and later deposit them 
207 244-250 
soldier’s handbook 
on food. These germs may also be carried by rain, or 
drainage, into wells or a stream which serves as a water sup- 
ply for some city or your own camp or post. 
■ 245. Drink plenty of water at intervals during the day but 
do not drink a large amount at one time, especially when 
you are overheated after exertion. Drink from your own 
glass or cup, or from a bubbling fountain. Never use a cup 
which is used by others, as someone may have left live germs 
on it from his mouth or hands, and you may catch a disease 
when drinking from it. For the same reason do not exchange 
pipes, cigars, musical instruments played by the mouth, 
handkerchiefs, towels, or shaving outfits. 
E3 246. Be sure to use your mosquito bar when mosquitoes are 
present. See that it is well tucked in and that it has no holes 
in it. 
S 247. Flies and cockroaches frequently carry disease germs 
and leave them on food and other articles over which they 
walk. Get rid of flies in every way. Whenever you see a fly 
in barracks, kill it. Be sure that screens in windows and 
doors are kept tightly closed. Pood containers and garbage 
cans must be kept tightly closed. Scraps of food, fruit skins, 
and manure should never be left on the ground about the 
post or camp. 
■ 248. Keep your barracks and squad room clean. If you 
find bedbugs in your bed, or in the barracks, report that fact 
to your company commander. 
H 249. Keep your hair cut short and your fingernails clean. 
This is especially important if you are detailed as a cook, 
baker, or in other positions in which you handle food. 
IS 250. a. Avoid venereal diseases. These diseases are almost 
always caught by sexual intercourse with an infected woman. 
If you have had sexual intercourse, report at once for “prophy- 
laxis.” The prophylactic treatment must be carried out thor- 
oughly and the directions followed exactly. The sooner you 
report for this treatment, and at least within 2 hours after 
exposure, the more certain you are of avoiding disease. 
b. If you should feel that you have caught a venereal dis- 
ease, report to the medical officer at once and do exactly as he 
208 soldier’s handbook 
250-251 
tells you. Any venereal disease can be cured much more 
quickly if proper treatment is begun early. Above all, do not 
try to treat yourself or go to an advertising quack doctor. Do- 
ing either of those things may result in serious damages to 
your body and health which will remain with you the rest of 
your life. 
B 251. While all of the rules given above are of the same im- 
portance in the field as they are in your post or cantonment, 
the following are of especial importance in your field service: 
a. Be more careful of the water you drink. Never drink any 
water from a stream, spring, well, or faucet until it has been 
passed as pure by a medical officer and a sign posted that the 
water is safe to drink. When orders have been issued that all 
drinking water must be boiled, be sure that the water you drink 
has actually been boiled for 20 minutes and not merely heated 
a little. Often water will be provided for drinking which has 
been purified in a sterilizing bag known as a Lyster bag. These 
bags are usually placed in your company street or near the 
company kitchen. When this is done drink only the water 
from the bag. Do not mind the peculiar taste; it will not hurt 
you in the least and comes from a powder issued by the Quar- 
termaster Corps to purify the water. Water purified in this 
way may make your urine sting a little but this means nothing 
harmful. Let the water run from the faucet of the bag into 
your own cup. Do not dip a cup into the bag and do not drink 
by putting your lips to the faucet. 
b. Be especially careful not to relieve yourself except in the 
latrine, or the night urine can, provided in your company 
street. 
c. Be sure that your mess kit and knife, fork, and spoon are 
thoroughly washed in hot, soapy water and rinsed in boiling 
water after they are used. Unless this is done in boiling water 
your mess gear may pick up disease germs from the men who 
used the water before you and you may contract disease. 
d. Use the mosquito bar whenever there are mosquitoes, or 
when directed by your company commander. 
e. Get a bath whenever possible. Watch for lice or other 
vermin on your body and clothing and, if found, report im- 
mediately to the medical officer. 
209 251-253 
soldier’s handbook 
/. Do not sit or lie directly on the damp ground. When 
you are hot or perspiring, or when your clothes are damp, do 
not remain where a draft can strike you. If you do, you will 
get chilled and as a result may contract a cold, rheumatism, 
or pneumonia. 
g. Every day, if possible, hang your blankets and clothing 
out to air in the sun and shake or beat them with a stick. 
Wash your shirts, underwear, and socks frequently. When- 
ever possible, roll up your tent so the air and sun can get 
in it. Keep it ventilated at night. 
h. Ditch your tent as soon as you can after it is put up, 
even if your camp is only for one night. If you do not, a 
little rain may spoil a whole night’s rest. 
i. Always prepare your bed before dark. If you have no 
cot, level off the ground and scrape out a little hollow for 
your hips. Use some straw, dry grass, leaves, or small 
branches. Sleep on your raincoat. This keeps the dampness 
from coming up from the ground and chilling your body. 
■ 252, The most important thing in your marching ability as 
a soldier is the care of your feet. You will find instructions 
on this matter in section II of chapter 11. 
Section II 
FIRST AID 
■ 253. During your military service you may find yourself 
in a situation where you will have to give first aid to the 
injured until a member of the Medical Department arrives. 
The following points are important for you to remember: 
a. Do not get excited; act quickly but quietly. 
b. Be gentle; do not handle a wounded man roughly; keep 
bystanders away, 
c. Do not try to do too much. 
d. A Medical Department man should be called as soon as 
possible. 
e. Make the injured man sit or lie down. 
/. Never move an injured man until medical help comes, 
unless it is impossible to keep him warm where he is, or 
210 soldier’s handbook 
253-255 
unless he must be removed from the battlefield to reach help. 
The less an injured man is moved right after being hurt, the 
better chance he will have to recover. 
g. Warmth is most important to prevent chilling and 
shock, even on a warm day. Fill canteens with hot water and 
place them under his armpits and between his legs, always 
outside of his clothing, so as not to burn him. Wrap him in 
blankets, coats, newspapers, or anything else available to keep 
him warm. If he is conscious and not wounded in the stom- 
ach, throat, or mouth, he may be given a hot drink. 
h. Do not pour liquids into his mouth if he is unconscious; 
they may choke him. 
i. Do not try to bring an unconscious wounded man to con- 
sciousness. Just let him be quiet, stop his bleeding, and keep 
him warm. 
j. Never touch a wound with anything unclean, such as 
dirty hands, or water and bandages that are not sterile. You 
may cause blood poisoning. Do not wash the wound. 
Jc. Expose the wound by unbuttoning, unlacing, or cutting 
the clothes, shoes, leggings, or boots. Open all articles of 
clothing which interfere with the circulation of blood or 
breathing but do it gently. 
■ 254. First-aid Packet.—Among the items of equipment is- 
sued to you is a first-aid packet. It consists of a little air- 
tight container and is carried in a small web pouch attached 
to your belt. When you place this packet in the pouch always 
have the ring down, at the bottom of the pouch, so that when 
the packet is taken out of the pouch the ring will not be 
caught and the packet accidentally opened. Never open the 
packet until it is necessary for you to use it in the treatment 
of a wound. 
■ 255. Use of First-aid Packet.—The following information 
will assist you in using the first-aid packet: 
a. The packet contains two sterile dressings, each wrapped 
in waxed paper. Each dressing consists of a gauze bandage 
(4 inches wide and 84 inches long), to which is sewed in the 
middle a “compress” or pad of gauze. The dressing is ar- 
ranged so that the compress (folded) is on the inside and a 
211 255-256 
soldier’s handbook 
roll of the bandage is on each of the two outer sides. When 
the rolls are pulled, the compress on the inside opens. This 
packet also contains two safety pins wrapped in waxed paper. 
5. To apply the first-aid packet, carefully remove the 
wrapper and carefully remove the paper from one of the 
packages without unfolding the compress or bandage, between 
the thumb and fingers. When ready to dress the wound, open 
the compress by pulling on the two rolls, being careful not to 
touch the inside of the compress with the fingers or anything 
else. Still holding one roll of the bandage in each hand, apply 
the compress to the wound, then wrap the bandage around 
the limb or part, and tie the ends together or fasten with 
safety pins. The second compress and bandage may be ap- 
plied over the first or it may be used for a sling if the arm is 
wounded, or to bind both legs together if one is injured. 
ic. For two wounds opposite each other, apply to one wound 
an unopened compress, to the other an opened compress, and 
hold both dressings in place with the bandage of the latter. 
d. For two wounds not opposite each other tie a compress 
over each. 
e. For a wound too large to be covered by the compress, find 
and break the stitch holding the compress together, unfold it, 
and apply as directed above. 
/. If the contents of one packet are not large enough to 
cover a wound thoroughly, use several. 
g. All wounds bleed more or less. Some bleed very freely 
because a large blood vessel has been wounded, and you must 
know how to stop this heavy bleeding, or hemorrhage, as it 
is called. Remember that while all wounds bleed a little, as 
a rule, this bleeding will stop in a few minutes if the patient 
is quiet, and that the firm pressure of the pads and bandage 
will keep it controlled. All severe flesh wounds should be 
dressed and splinted, if possible to do so, as is done for a frac- 
ture. This will insure immobility and help to prevent 
bleeding. 
B 256. Hemorrhage.—a. Bleeding from the arteries is the 
most dangerous because the blood flows fast and will soon 
cause a man to bleed to death unless the flow of blood is 
stopped. In arterial bleeding the blood squirts from the ar- 
212 soldier’s handbook 
256-258 
tery with each pulsation of the heart and is bright red in 
color. 
b. Blood from a vein flows in a slow, steady stream, and 
the color is dark red or purple. 
c. Capillary bleeding is an oozing of blood from a cut sur- 
face and is generally the least dangerous. 
■ 257. To Control Bleeding.—a. To control bleeding from 
the arteries quickly, press upon the blood vessel between 
the wound and the heart. 
b. To stop bleeding from the scalp apply pressure with the 
tips of the fingers in front of the ear just above where the 
lower jaw can be felt working in its socket. A branch of the 
artery crosses the temple on a line from the upper border 
of the ear to above the eyebrow. (See fig. 81 A.) 
c. To stop bleeding from the neck and head press the 
thumb and fingers deeply into the neck in front of the big. 
plainly seen muscle which reaches from behind the ear to 
the upper part of the breast bone. (See fig. 81B.) 
d. In bleeding from wounds of the shoulder or armpit press 
the thumb deeply into the hollow behind the middle of the 
collar bone. 
e. To stop bleeding from the arm or hand press outward 
against the bone just behind the inner border of the large 
muscle (biceps) of the arm. (See fig. 81C.) 
/. In bleeding from the thigh, leg, or foot, press strongly 
with the thumbs on the artery at the upper part of the inside 
of the thigh, where the artery passes over the bone. (See 
fig. 81Z>.) 
IS 258. Tourniquet.—a. If the bleeding from an arm or leg 
continues in spite of pressure exerted by the thumb or fingers, 
the bleeding must be stopped by the use of a tourniquet. 
This consists of a pad, which is placed on the line of the 
artery, and a strap or band that goes over the pad and around 
the limb, so that when tightened it will press the pad down 
upon the artery and interrupt the flow of blood. For the 
arm and hand the tourniquet pad is applied over a point on 
the inside of the arm about a hand’s breadth below the arm 
pit. (See fig. 82.) For the thigh and leg the tourniquet is 
applied 4 or 5 inches below the groin, and on the inside of 
213 258 
soldier’s handbook 
the thigh where the main artery passes over the bone, (See 
fig. 83.) 
b. The pad may consist of a roll of bandage or a small stone 
or other hard object wrapped in something to make it less 
rough; and a bandage, belt, handkerchief, or necktie may be 
used for the strap. After tying the strap loosely around the 
limb, the required degree of pressure can be made by passing 
a stick or bayonet under the band, but directly opposite the 
pad, and twisting it so that the pad is pressed down firmly 
upon the blood vessel. 
c. Turn the stick slowly and stop at once when the blood 
ceases to flow, fixing the stick in place with another bandage. 
Figure 81.—Pressure points. 
Harm may be done if too much force is used or if pressure is 
kept up too long. It is a good rule to loosen the pressure 
at the end of each 20 to 30 minutes and allow the stick to 
remain loose, but in place, if no bleeding appears. The 
tourniquet can be tightened if bleeding begins again. 
d. Do not make the tourniquet any tighter than necessary 
to check the bleeding. At best it is painful. 
214 soldier’s handbook 
258 
e. A tourniquet should never be hidden by clothing or a 
bandage so that it cannot be seen. 
Figure 82.—Use of tourniquet application. 
Figure 83.—Application of tourniquet to thigh. 
215 258-260 
soldier’s handbook 
f. Mark the patient’s tag plainly, “Tourniquet,” with the 
date and hour of application. If he is conscious, instruct 
him to tell every medical officer that he has a tourniquet. 
g. If a tourniquet is left on tight for as much as six hours, 
the patient will probably lose his arm or leg. 
■ 259. Fractures.—The following are some of the more com- 
mon injuries for which you may be required to give first aid 
and the method you should use to treat them until some 
member of the Medical Department arrives: 
a. A fracture is a break in a bone. Fractures occur most 
frequently in the arms or legs. When the long bones of the 
arm or leg are broken the wounded man loses power of con- 
trol over the limb and it gives way and may be crooked 
instead, of straight. 
b. A simple fracture is one in which there is no wound ex- 
tending from the broken bone through the skin. A com- 
pound fracture is one in which the broken bone has pushed 
through the skin and therefore is exposed to the dangers of 
infection from the outside. A complicated fracture is one 
where there is damage to adjoining large blood vessels, nerves, 
or muscles from movement of the sharp and jagged edges of 
the broken bone. 
c. In no injury is the outcome more influenced by the 
character of first-aid treatment than in fractures. Improper 
handling or immediate movement may produce or increase 
shock and deprive the patient of a chance for recovery. All 
fractures, or suspected fracture cases, should be handled 
gently. It is equally as important to know what not to do 
as to know what to do. 
d. Immediate movement or transportation of the patient 
is usually very dangerous to him. The first-aid treatment 
should be given where he lies and medical assistance should 
be brought to the patient instead of carrying the patient 
to the doctor. 
■ 260. Treatment of Fractures.—a. Except when the bone 
has broken through the skin, if the condition of the injured 
person is such that he can walk or be carried to medical assist- 
ance, a broken leg or arm can be fixed in position by splints 
216 soldier’s handbook 
or other available material. Many common materials will 
do for temporary splints, such as shingles, pieces of board, 
rifle boots, bayonet scabbards, a rain spout cut and fitted 
to the limb, or bunches of twigs. It is important that the 
splints be well padded on the side to be applied next to the 
arm or leg and that they be securely bound by bandaging or 
by tying above and below the point of fracture but not over it. 
b. In fractures with wounds or hemorrhage the flow of 
blood should be stopped and the wound bandaged before 
splints are applied. If possible, it is best to wait for expert 
medical care to apply the splints in such cases. 
c. Fractures of the arm should be supported by a sling 
after splinting. Arm slings can be made of bandages, or can 
be improvised from clothing by using safety pins to fasten 
the coat sleeve to the front of the coat in order to support 
the arm. The coat flap can be used for the same purpose 
by pinning it or by punching a hole through the lower edge 
of the flap and buttoning this to a coat button. 
d. In splinting, the limb should first be straightened out 
gently and the broken bone alined by quickly but firmly pull- 
ing upon the end of it, if necessary, and then fixed or re- 
tained in position by splints. 
e. For a broken upper arm apply two splints, one in front, 
the other behind, if the bone is broken near the elbow; or to 
the inner and outer sides if the fracture is in the middle or 
near the shoulder. Support the arm by a sling. 
/. For a broken forearm place the forearm across the breast, 
thumb up, and apply to the inner surface a splint extending 
to the tips of the fingers, and another to the outer surface, 
extending to the wrist. 
g. For a fracture of the collarbone bend the forearm to 
a right angle in front of the body and support it by a sling. 
h. For a broken thigh apply a long splint, reaching from the 
armpit to beyond the foot on the outside and another from the 
groin to the foot on the inside. A rifle can be used as an out- 
side splint, and a rifle boot for the inner. A blanket rolled into 
two rolls, to form a trough, will help to keep a broken leg firm. 
i. For a broken lower leg or ankle apply two splints, one on 
the outside, the other on the inside of the limb, extending from 
273916°—41—8 
217 260-261 
soldier’s handbook 
the knee to beyond the foot. A bayonet and scabbard are 
serviceable when nothing better can be had. Support can be 
given by a roll of clothing and two sticks. 
j. If no better means are at hand for splinting, tie a broken 
leg to the other leg or bind a broken arm to the body. 
■ 261. Poisoned Wounds.—a. Snake venom acts quickly. The 
main object is to prevent the poison from passing into the 
blood circulation. If the wound is on a limb, apply a tourni- 
quet just above the wound to increase bleeding. A necktie, 
handkerchief, or bandage can be used as a tourniquet. It 
should be tight enough to prevent the blood flowing back 
through the veins but not tight enough to prevent the blood 
flow in the arteries. Do not leave it on longer than 1 hour. 
Whether or not the bite is on a part of the body where you can 
use a tourniquet, make a cut Vz by % inch, over each fang 
mark and, if possible, a cut connecting the two fang punctures. 
The cut must be deep enough, % to Vz inch, to secure free 
bleeding; then get the poison out of the wound by suction. 
This may be done by sucking with your mouth, or by heating 
a bottle and applying its mouth tightly over the wound. The 
cooling of the bottle produces the suction. Snake venom is 
harmless in the mouth unless there are cracks or wounds in 
the mouth or lips. Keep the patient quiet and secure medical 
aid as quickly as you can. Do not give the patient liquor. 
The best aid you can give him is to produce free bleeding 
followed by suction. 
b. Bites of spiders, scorpions, and other insects should be 
treated in the same manner as snake bites. The proper re- 
moval of the stinger is important. This should be done by 
grasping the stinger with a pair of small forceps and remov- 
ing all of it. A paste made of baking soda, or a cold, moist 
dressing, using a diluted solution of salt, soda, or ammonia is 
helpful. 
c. The first-aid treatment for animal bites is the same as 
that for ordinary wounds. You should get medical advice as 
soon as possible, however, even though the wound appears un- 
important, since animal bites may become quickly infected 
unless dressed properly. 
218 soldier’s handbook 
262-263 
■ 262. Fainting.—lf the patient can be made comfortable, it 
is usually best to allow him to lie where he falls; lower his head 
and shoulders by elevating his hips; loosen the tight clothing. 
Sprinkling hia face with cold water, and inhalations of 
ammonia or smelling salts are helpful. 
■ 263. Burns.—a. Burns may be caused by dry or moist heat, 
electricity, and chemicals. They are classified in degrees ac- 
cording to the depth to which the tissues are injured. Shock 
and infection are to be feared in dry burns. 
(1) First degree—The skin is reddened but there is no 
blister. 
(2) Second degree—The skin is blistered. 
(3) Third degree—The skin is destroyed or charred, as 
from contact with flames. 
b. The following general rules apply to the first-aid treat- 
ment of all burns; 
(1) Do not pull the clothing from the burned part; snip or 
cut it off. 
(2) Do not break or prick blisters if present. 
(3) Treat shock early in all severe burns. 
(4) When possible, protect the burn quickly with a sterile 
dressing, applying medication as indicated in c to / below. 
c. First-degree burns.—The treatment is directed toward 
the relief of pain since the skin is unbroken and there is no 
danger from infection. Any substance that will relieve the 
pain is satisfactory. An oily substance such as petrolatum 
(vaseline), olive oil, or castor oil is usable. Cold water or soda 
in water is soothing when immediately applied. It must be 
remembered that if the burn is at all serious, such as found in 
second- or third-degree burns, oily substances are not to be 
applied. 
d. Second-degree burns.—Here the injury must be regarded 
as an open wound; only material that is known to be clean 
can be used. Remove the loose clothing, but do not try to 
remove material that sticks to the skin. The application of 
sterile gauze soaked in a solution of Epsom salts (2 table- 
spoonfuls to a pint of boiled water) is very good. The dress- 
ings should be kept moist and warm until further aid is ob- 
219 263-264 
soldier’s handbook 
talned. The best treatment is application of gauze saturated 
with 2 percent picric acid solution applied securely but not 
tightly. A 5 percent tannic acid solution similarly applied 
is of equal value. Never apply iodine or similar substance to 
a burn and never apply absorbent cotton to a burned surface. 
Shock is always present to some degree in every case. 
e. Third-degree burns.—These are always serious and re- 
quire medical attention promptly. The first-aid treatment 
consists chiefly of keeping the patient warm and treating 
shock. If medical attention can be obtained promptly, it is 
best merely to lay a sterile dressing lightly on the wound. 
If over 30 minutes will elapse before help can be obtained, 
one of the dressings used for second-degree burns should be 
applied. 
/. Chemical burns.—Burns caused by acids or alkalies 
should be washed with large quantities of water, prefer- 
ably lukewarm, until the chemical is thoroughly removed. 
All clothing should be cut away with scissors. Apply a salve 
dressing after the chemical is completely removed, and secure 
a medical officer’s services. Eye burns require careful atten- 
tion. The best first-aid treatment is to flush the eye thor- 
oughly with clean olive oil, mineral oil, or castor oil. If these 
are not available, use water; a drinking fountain that throws 
a stream is excellent for this purpose. After washing, the 
eye should be covered with a moist dressing and further 
medical aid secured. 
■ 264. Sunstroke.—a. Sunstroke is a very dangerous condi- 
tion, usually caused by direct exposure to the rays of the sun, 
especially when the air is moist. The symptoms are head- 
ache, dizziness, oppression, and sometimes vomiting; the skin 
is hot and dry, and the face flushed; the pulse is rapid and 
full; the temperature is high, often ranging between 107° 
and 110°. Unconsciousness usually occurs, and the body be- 
comes relaxed; however, convulsions may occur. 
b. Treatment.—Remove the person to a shady, cool place, if 
possible, and loosen or remove the clothing. Lay the patient 
on his back with shoulders elevated. Apply cold to the head 
by means of wet cloths, ice bags, or ice. The brain cannot 
withstand the effects of high temperatures. Cool the body by 
giving cold baths for 20 minutes at a time combined with brisk 
220 soldier’s handbook 
264-267 
massage of the limbs and trunk. Cold wet cloths or ice bags 
may be used. Wrapping the body in a sheet and pouring on 
cold water every few minutes is very effective. Do not overdo 
any of these procedures. Stop every few minutes to observe 
the effects on the patient. If the skin again gets hot repeat 
the treatment. Do not give him stimulants to drink while 
unconsciousness lasts. 
■ 265. Heat Exhaustion.—This is caused by exposure to high 
temperature as found in boiler rooms, foundries, bakeries, and 
similar places. The first signs of heat exhaustion are dizzi- 
ness, nausea, and uncertain gait. The face is pale, the body 
is covered with a heavy perspiration, and the skin is cold and 
clammy. Breathing is shallow, the pulse is weak, and the 
temperature may be normal or somewhat elevated. Fainting 
may occur, or prostration may become severe. Remove the 
patient to circulating cool air; place him on his back and let 
him drink freely of cool salt water (1 teaspoonful of table 
salt in a pint of water). Call a medical officer if the patient 
does not recover promptly. 
■ 266. Freezing.—a. The symptoms of freezing are cold in 
the part, then pain, and finally, loss of sensation. The affected 
part becomes white or bluish white. Slowly thaw the frozen 
part by using extra clothing, applying it to another part of 
the body, or wrapping it in cloths soaked in cool water. Do not 
expose frozen tissues to a hot stove or radiator. Do not rub 
the frozen part either with the bare hands or with snow; the 
tissues will be bruised and torn, and gangrene may result. 
Medical attention is usually necessary after freezing. 
h. When a man becomes unconscious from cold, if possible 
carry him into a cool room, cover him well with blankets, and 
move his arms and legs gently but steadily. When conscious- 
ness returns, give him warm drinks and let him lie quietly. 
■ 267. Pain in the Abdomen.—Pain in the abdomen or what is 
known as a common “stomach ache,” may be due to a number 
of causes, many of which may be serious. Any case where 
there is nausea and vomiting, accompanying or following pain 
and tenderness over all or any part of the abdomen, and with 
pain and tenderness in the lower right parts of the abdomen 
may mean appendicitis. Appendicitis may also occur without 267-269 
soldier’s handbook 
nausea. If you or one of your comrades should have these 
symptoms, see a medical officer at once. In the meantime no 
food, no water, and especially no laxatives, should be taken 
until directed by a medical officer. 
■ 268. Athlete’s Foot.—Ringworm of the feet or “athlete’s 
foot” is a very common skin disease. In some cases it may 
become so severe as to be disabling. It consists chiefly of an 
inflammation of the skin between the toes and on the soles of 
the feet, but it may also appear on the hands. Usually there 
is considerable itching. It is usually spread by contact of the 
bare feet with the floors, mats, and benches of showers and 
swimming pools; but you may also acquire it by using or 
wearing the towels, slippers, shoes, or other articles of some 
one who has it. The care of the feet, as described in Section 
11, Chapter 11, “Marches,” is important in the prevention and 
control of this disease. Keep your feet dry, and after a bath 
dry carefully the spaces between your toes before putting on 
your socks and shoes. If your feet perspire a great deal, 
apply the issue foot powder twice a day. Your corporal or 
the noncommissioned officer in charge of your unit will issue 
this powder to you when you ask for it. If you think you 
have athlete’s foot, you should see a medical officer as soon 
as possible so that you may be cured and will not spread the 
disease among other members of your organization. 
■ 269. Gases Used in Warfare.—The following simple general 
rules will help you in giving first-aid treatment to men 
suffering from gases used in warfare. 
a. In handling a gassed man always wear your mask and, 
if you have them, gloves. If you do not have gloves, rub your 
hands with dry lime, or wash them with soap and water as 
soon as possible after handling the man. 
h. Move the man from the gassed area as soon as possible. 
If possible move him from low ground or woods to a hillside 
or knoll. Do not carry him into a dugout or cellar. Gas is 
heavier than air and will descend and cling to the lower 
levels. Do not allow a gassed man to talk or walk. 
c. Remove the man’s equipment and clothing, unless un- 
due exposure to the cold will result, but leave his mask on 
until you are certain there is no gas in the air. 
222 soldier’s handbook 
269-272 
d. Remember that mustard gas from the clothing, equip- 
ment, or body of a man gassed with mustard will cling to 
you or your clothing. Avoid blankets, litters, or areas on 
the ground occupied by such cases. 
e. Prevent men gassed with mustard from rubbing their 
eyes, mouths, or bodies. Do not bandage their eyes. 
■ 270. Peacetime Gases.—The chief poisonous gases encoun- 
tered in civil life are illuminating gas, carbon monoxide (mo- 
tor exhausts), charcoal, and mine gases. The first thing to 
do in all of these gases is to get the patient into fresh air. 
The fresh air of a warm room is preferable to extremely cold 
air. If breathing is weak or irregular or has stopped, arti- 
ficial respiration by the Schaefer method should be started 
and continued until normal respiration has been established. 
A medical officer should always be called, since the patient 
may die even after breathing is apparently normal. 
■ 271. Artificial Respiration.—Asphyxia, suffocation, or ces- 
sation of breathing occurs most frequently in drowning, elec- 
trical shock, and gas poisoning. The safest and most effective 
method of applying artificial respiration is the prone pressure 
or Schaefer method. Oxygen respirators, which are available 
at many bathing beaches and military stations, are very effi- 
cient in trained hands, but for unskilled personnel, are less 
satisfactory than the Schaefer method. 
■ 272. Drowning.—a. Being under water for over 5 minutes 
is usually fatal, but an effort to revive the apparently drowned 
should always be made. It is very important that artificial 
respiration be started at the earliest possible moment after 
the patient has been removed from the water. 
b. (1) Lay the patient face down, force his mouth open, 
pull the tongue forward, and remove false teeth, juice, vomitus, 
or debris from his mouth and throat. 
(2) Raise him by the hips in order to drain the water from 
his lungs. 
(3) Lay him on his belly, preferably at a spot where his 
head will be lower than his feet. One of his arms should be 
extended over his head, the other bent at the elbow so that 
his face can be turned on the side and rest on the hands. 
223 272 
soldier’s handbook 
(4) Kneel astride the patient’s thighs, with your knees 
placed at such a distance from his hips as will allow you to 
exert the pressure on his lower ribs as described below. Place 
the palms of your hands on the small of his back with your 
fingers on his lower ribs, your little fingers just touching his 
lowest rib, with your thumbs and fingers in natural position 
and the tips of your fingers out of sight just around the sides 
of his chest wall. The heels of the hands should be placed as 
far from the backbone as possible without slipping off. 
(5) With your arms held straight, swing forward slowly so 
that the weight of your body is gradually brought to bear upon 
the patient. Do not bend your elbows. This operation should 
take about 2 seconds. (See fig. 84.) 
(6) Now immediately swing backward so as to remove all 
pressure completely and suddenly. Leave the hands in place 
if possible. (See fig. 85.) 
(7) After about 2 seconds repeat the operation. The cycle 
of compression and release should take about 4 or 5 seconds 
and should be repeated at the rate of 12 to 15 times per minute. 
(8) Continue the operation without interruption until nat- 
ural breathing is restored, or until the subject is unquestion- 
Figure 84.—Artificial respiration, first position. 
224 soldier’s handbook 
272 
ably dead. Remember, many patients have died because arti- 
ficial respiration has been stopped too soon. Always continue 
the operation for 2 hours or longer. 
(9) Aside from the resuscitation, the most valuable aid that 
can be rendered is keeping the patient warm. After artificial 
respiration has been started, have an assistant loosen the 
clothing and wrap the patient in any clothing that is avail- 
able. Use hot bricks, pads, heaters, or similar means, but be 
sure the person is not burned by your treatment. 
(10) When the patient revives he should be kept lying down 
and not allowed to stand or sit up; this will prevent undue 
Figure 85.—Artificial respiration, second position. 
strain on the heart. Stimulants such as hot tea or coffee, or 
aromatic spirits of ammonia, can be given as soon as the 
patient is perfectly conscious. 
(11) At times a patient, after temporary recovery of res- 
piration, stops breathing again; artificial respiration should 
be resumed at once. 
(12) Due to the length of time this operation may be kept 
up, one, two, or more operators may be necessary. A change 
of operators can be made without loss of rhythm of respira- 
225 272-274 
soldier’s handbook 
tion. If this point is remembered no confusion will result 
when the change occurs and the respiratory count will be kept 
even. The great danger is stopping artificial respiration too 
soon. In many cases, breathing has been established after 3 
or 4 hours of artificial respiration, and there are instances 
where normal breathing has been reestablished after 8 hours. 
The ordinary and general tests for death should not be ac- 
cepted; a medical officer should make several careful exami- 
nations at various intervals before the procedure is allowed 
to be stopped. 
■ 273. Electrical Shock.—The rescue of the victim from a 
live wire is always dangerous. If the switch is near, turn the 
current off, but lose no time in looking for the switch. Use 
a dry stick, dry clothing, dry rope, or some other dry non- 
conductor in removing the victim from the wire. Start arti- 
ficial respiration immediately by the Schaefer method as pre- 
viously described. Do not regard early stiffening as a sign 
of death; always keep up the artificial respiration for sev- 
eral hours. 
■ 274. Litters.—lf it becomes necessary to move an injured 
man for even a short distance, it is best to use a service litter 
which is furnished by the Medical Department. If a litter is 
not available, one of the following means may be used to 
construct one: 
a. Camp cots, window shutters, doors, benches, and lad- 
ders, properly padded. 
b. Sacks, bags, or bedticks, by ripping the bottoms or 
snipping off the corners, passing two poles through them, and 
tying cross pieces to the poles to keep them apart. 
c. A shelter half, a blanket, piece of matting, or carpet 
may be fastened to poles by tacks or twine. 
d. Hay, straw, or leafy twigs, over a framework of poles 
and cross sticks. 
e. Rope, wire, or rawhide may be woven between poles and 
this network covered with a blanket. 
/. The usual way is to use blankets or shelter tents, and 
poles about 7 feet long. The blanket is spread on the ground. 
One pole is laid across the center of the blanket which is then 
folded over it. The second pole is placed across the center 
226 soldier’s handbook 
274-275 
of the new fold and the blanket is folded over the second pole 
as over the first and the free end of the blanket fixed. (See 
fig. 86.) 
g. A litter may also be prepared by turning two or three 
blouses inside out and buttoning them up, sleeves in, then 
passing poles through the sleeves; the backs of the blouses 
form the bed. 
■ 275. Other Means of Transporting the Injured.—When 
the condition of the injured man is such that it is not neces- 
sary to carry him on a litter he may be moved for a short 
distance in one of the following ways: 
a. Rifle-coat seat.—A good seat may be made by running 
the barrel of a rifle through each sleeve of an overcoat, turned 
inside out and buttoned up, sleeves inside, so that the coat 
lies back up, collar to the rear. One bearer rolls the tail 
tightly around the barrels and takes his grasp over them; 
the other bearer holds the rifles by the butts, trigger guards 
up. (See fig. 87.) 
b. Rifle-blanket seat.—Fold blanket once from side to side. 
Lay a rifle transversely upon it across its center so that the 
Figure 86.—Litter improvised with blankets. 
227 275 
soldier’s handbook 
butt and muzzle project beyond the edges: fold one end of the 
blanket upon the other end and lay a second rifle upon the 
new center in the same manner as before. The free end of 
the blanket is folded upon the end containing the first rifle so 
as to project a couple of inches beyond the first rifle. The 
litter is raised from the ground with trigger guards up. 
Figure 87.—Rifle-coat seat. 
c. One hearer.—A single bearer may support a slightly in- 
jured man or carry a patient in his arms (fig, 88) or on his 
back (fig. 89) or across his shoulders (fig. 90). If the patient 
is helpless, the last named is best. This is done as follows: 
(1) Turn the patient on his face, and step astride his body, 
facing toward the patient’s head with hands under his arm- 
228 soldier’s handbook 
275 
pits, and lift him to his knees; then, clasping your hands over 
his abdomen, lift him to his feet; next seize the right wrist 
of the patient with your left hand and draw the arm over 
your head and down upon your left shoulder; now shift your- 
self in front, stoop, pass your right arm between the legs and 
grasp the patient’s right wrist; with your left hand grasp 
Figure 88.—Patient carried in arms. 
the patient’s left hand and steady It against your side when 
you rise. 
(2) In lowering the patient the motions are reversed. 
Should the patient be wounded in such a manner as to require 
these motions to be conducted from the right side instead 
of left, as described above, the change is simply one of hands. 
229 275 
soldier’s handbook 
the motions proceed as directed substituting right for left and 
vice versa. 
d. Two bearers.—The bearers take position at patient, one 
man between the patient’s legs and one at his head, both 
facing toward his feet. The rear bearer, having raised the 
patient to a sitting posture, clasps him from behind around 
Figure 89.—Patient carried on back. 
the body under the arms, the front bearer passes his hands 
from the outside under the flexed knees; both rise together. 
This method requires no effort on the part of the patient 
but is not applicable to severe injuries of the extremities. 
e. Horseback.—(l) The help required to mount a disabled 
man will depend upon the site and nature of his injury. In 
230 soldier’s handbook 
275 
many cases he is able to help himself materially. The horse, 
blindfolded if necessary, is held by an attendant. 
(2) Once mounted, the patient should be made as safe and 
comfortable as possible. A comrade may be mounted behind 
him to guide the horse; otherwise a lean-back may be pro- 
vided, made of a blanket roll, a pillow, or a bag filled with 
leaves or grass. If the patient is very weak, the lean-back 
may be made of a sapling bent into an arch over the cantle of 
the saddle, its ends securely fastened. 
Figure 90.—Patient carried across shoulders. 
231 CHAPTER 15 
THE RATION 
B 276. The Ration.—A ration is the allowance of food for the 
feeding of one person for one day. Each soldier is authorized 
to receive one ration each day that he is on the active list of 
the Army. 
■ 277. Kinds of Ration.—There are several different kinds of 
rations used in the Army of the United States, but the ones 
in which you will be interested are the following: 
a. The garrison ration is that which the Government pre- 
scribes in time of peace for all persons entitled to a ration 
except under special circumstances when other rations are 
prescribed. The different items such as meat, fresh vegetables 
and fruit, beverages, bread, and other articles of food which 
make up the ration are called “ration components.” The 
number of components and the amount of each required to 
give a soldier a well-balanced and nourishing daily diet have 
been carefully determined by food experts. The money value 
of the ration is figured each month from the wholesale costs of 
food to the Government, and your organization mess account 
is credited with the total amount required to feed all the men 
In your unit. The meals served by your organization mess 
sergeant in time of peace, and while your organization is in a 
post, camp, or cantonment, will usually be prepared from the 
components of the garrison ration. After the mess sergeant 
has made up his menus he will buy the various articles of food 
required from the money which the Government has credited 
to your organization mess account. Some of these items he 
may buy from the quartermaster commissary. Others he may 
buy from local markets or farmers, in order to take advantage 
of certain foods in season or because the commissary may not 
have them in stock. Any savings which he makes are called 
“ration savings” and became part of your unit mess fund, to be 
expended by your organization commander on extras for the 
mess on holidays or other special occasions. 
232 soldier’s handbook 
277-278. 
b. The field ration is that prescribed for use in time of war 
or other emergency. In time of peace it may be used some- 
times for training purposes. Its components are prescribed 
by the War Department or the commanding general of the 
field forces. No ration savings are permitted and the com- 
ponents are issued “in kind.” This means that instead of 
your mess sergeant buying the various components of the 
ration from the quartermaster or in local markets, the quar- 
termaster will issue to him certain items of food sufficient to 
feed all the members of your organization. There are four 
kinds of field rations— 
(l) Field ration A corresponds as nearly as practicable to 
the peacetime garrison ration and contains “perishable” items 
such as fresh meat and vegetables. It is issued as often as 
the circumstances will permit. 
(2) Field ration B corresponds as nearly as practicable to. 
field ration A, except that nonperishable or canned products 
replace the perishable items. 
(3) Field ration C consists of previously cooked or prepared 
food, packed in sealed cans, and which may be eaten either 
hot or cold. Each ration consists of three cans of meat and 
vegetables and three cans of crackers, sugar, and soluble 
coffee. 
(4) Field ration D consists of three 4-ounce bars of con- 
centrated chocolate. 
(5-) Sometimes the field ration may be a combination of 
types C and D. In this case it will usually consist of two cans, 
of meat and vegetables, two cans of the crackers, sugar, and 
soluble coffee, and two of the 4-ounce bars of concentrated 
chocolate. 
■ 278. Our Government spends more money for the food of 
its soldiers than any other nation in the world. A great deal 
of time is spent on the training of mess sergeants and cooks 
and you will soon discover that your food is better prepared, 
there is more of it, and it has a greater variety than that of 
most families in civil life. It is especially selected to build up 
your body and give you the energy and endurance which will 
carry you to success on the battlefield. If at first it seems 
strange to you and you miss the meals with which you are- 
familiar, do not be tempted to eat in neighboring civilian. 
233 278-282 
soldier’s handbook 
restaurants. You will profit both in your pocket and stomach 
if you eat all of your meals in your organization mess. 
■ 279. When you go into the field your mess sergeant and 
cooks will accompany you. There is special cooking equip- 
ment in your organization which will follow you. On this 
your food can be prepared in the same way as it is cooked on 
the stoves of your barracks or cantonment. During combat 
all organization kitchens are usually grouped in sheltered 
locations in rear where the meals can be prepared without 
interference by the enemy. Immediately after dark, trucks 
bring the cooked meals forward so that they can be dis- 
tributed by carrying parties. 
■ 280. During Campaign.—During a campaign the com- 
manding general of your division or a higher commander 
may direct that each soldier carry a field ration as part of 
his field equipment. He may decide to do this because he 
feels that the condition of the roads or transportation may 
delay the arrival of the cooked meals and in such a case he 
wants to be sure that no soldier goes hungry. A ration which 
is carried by a soldier is called an individual reserve. It will 
probably be field ration C or D, or a combination of both. 
■ 281. a. It may sometime happen during campaigns that 
you and one or more of your comrades may be separated from 
your unit. If there is another organization near you, you 
will always be able to get a meal from it by reporting‘to its 
first sergeant or mess sergeant; giving your name and organi- 
zation and explaining how you happen to be separated from 
your own unit. 
h. If there is no other organization near, it may then be 
necessary for you and your comrades to cook your own meals, 
using your mess kits for this purpose and the food you have 
with you. Since you will probably have field ration C with 
you, this will be very easy. Simply heat one or more of the 
cans in hot water, and open them. If you, or any of your 
comrades, have had boy scout training you will probably be 
able to prepare a very good meal from the ration. 
■ 282. Fire for Cooking.—a. Remember that the best fire for 
cooking is a small clear one, or, better yet, a few brisk coals. 
With your bayonet, dig a trench in the ground, laid with the 
234 soldier’s handbook 
282 
wind, about a foot long, 4 inches wide, and 6 inches deep. 
Gather a number of sticks about 1 inch in diameter. Dead 
limbs taken from a tree are dryer than those picked up from 
the ground. Split some of these and shave them into kin- 
dling. Start the fire in the trench gradually, piling on the 
heavier wood as the fire grows. When the trench is full of 
burning wood, allow it a few minutes to bum down to coals. 
Then rest the meat can and cup over the trench and start the 
cooking. You may support them, if necessary, with green 
sticks. 
b. If the ground is rocky or stony, and you cannot scrape 
a trench in the soil, you may make your fire between two 
small, flat stones, or with two parallel logs. These should be 
placed so that the draft will pass between them. The meat 
can can be placed on the stones, across the fire, and the cup 
for boiling coffee at the end, away from the draft, where it 
will get the most heat. Always see that the fire is completely 
out before you leave. 
235 PAY AND ALLOWANCES 
CHAPTER 16 
■ 283. Rate of Pay.—When you first enter the military serv- 
ice, your rate of pay will be $21.00 per month. This pay is in 
addition to the food, clothing, medical, and dental attention 
which the government provides you without charge. After 
a period of 4 months, however, and provided you have not 
demonstrated inefficiency or other unfitness, your pay will be 
raised to $30.00 per month. Prom that point on your pay 
need only be limited by your ambition, your attention to duty, 
and the manner in which you qualify yourself for promotion. 
Remember that promotion is on a strictly competitive basis. 
Your organization commander will promote the man who he 
believes is best qualified for the next vacancy, and on whom 
he has found he can depend. The various grades, with their 
rates of monthly pay as authorized by Congress in the act 
of September 16, 1940, are given below: 
Pirst grade—Master sergeant $126.00 
Second grade—Pirst sergeant and technical sergeant. 84.00 
Third grade—Staff sergeant 72. 00 
Pourth grade—Sergeant 60. 00 
Pifth grade—Corporal 54.00 
Sixth grade—Private, first class 36. 00 
Seventh grade—Private with over 4 months’ service. 30. 00 
Private with less than 4 months’ service during first 
enlistment period or whose inefficiency or other 
unfitness has been determined under regulations. _ 21.00 
■ 284. Specialist.—lf you are a private or a private, Ist class, 
you may have certain qualifications which will enable you to 
he rated as a specialist and receive the following pay in addi- 
tion to the pay of your grade. Specialist ratings are given in 
a limited number to men trained to do certain kinds of work 
236 soldier’s handbook 
284-288 
such as electricians, mechanics, radio operators, riveters, 
woodworkers, clerks, or cooks: 
Per month. 
Specialist Ist class $3O. 00 
Specialist 2d class 25.00 
Specialist 3d class 20. 00 
Specialist 4th class 15.00 
Specialist sth class 6. 00 
Specialist 6th class 3. 00 
■ 285. Air Corps.—lf you are in the Air Corps, during such 
time as you are authorized to take part regularly and fre- 
quently in aerial flights, you will receive additional pay of 
50 percent of the pay of your grade. If you are a private, 
private, Ist class, corporal, or sergeant and are rated as an air 
mechanic, Ist class, you will receive the pay of the second 
grade; or if you are rated as an air mechanic 2d class, you 
will receive the pay of the third grade during the time you hold 
your rating. 
■ 286. Decorations.—For certain decorations or awards, for 
distinguished service you will receive an additional amount 
of money each month. 
■ 287. Furlough Allowance.—lf you are granted a furlough, 
you are entitled to an allowance for rations during the period 
of the furlough. This allowance will be paid to you when you 
report back to your station on or before the date of expiration 
of the furlough. It will not be paid if you overstay your fur- 
lough unless you are excused for overstaying by your com- 
manding officer. It will not be paid if you fail to report back 
to your own station. 
■ 288. Deposits.—While you are in active military service you 
may deposit with the Government, as savings, any amount not 
less than $5.00. Your deposits will be repaid to you when you 
are discharged and, if they have been deposited for 6 months 
or longer, will draw interest. Your deposits are not subject 
to collection for debts unless you authorize, in writing, 
collection of amounts due the United States or for your dis- 
charge by purchase. 
237 289-294 
soldier’s handbook 
■ 289. Allotments.—You may make an allotment of your pay 
for the support of your family or dependent relatives, or for 
payment of premiums for commercial life insurance if such 
insurance is on your own life. The amount allotted will be 
deducted from your pay each month and paid directly to 
the insurance company or person you have designated in 
your allotment. 
■ 290. Government Insurance.—You may take out a policy 
for National life insurance on your own life. The premiums 
may be paid by you directly to the Veterans Administration in 
monthly payments, or you may authorize their deduction from 
your pay each month. 
■ 291. If you desire any further information regarding allot- 
ments, deposits, or Government insurance, see your first ser- 
geant. He will be glad to help you. 
■ 292. Deductions.—Deductions will be made from your pay 
if you are found responsible for loss or damage to Government 
property and if you are absent without leave or absent sick, 
not in line of duty. You do not lose pay for sickness or injury 
in line of duty or for absence in confinement; however, the 
time lost by absence in confinement, by absence without leave, 
or by absence due to sickness not in line of duty has to be made 
up at the end of your enlistment period. Two-thirds of your 
monthly pay may be taken to satisfy any amount which you 
may owe the United States or which you may owe to the com- 
pany fund, post exchange, or United States Motion Picture 
Service. 
■ 293. Travel Pay.—Upon honorable discharge from the serv- 
ice you will be entitled to travel pay at the rate of 5 cents per 
mile for the distance from the place you are discharged to the 
place you were accepted for enlistment, enrollment, or muster 
into the Army, not including sea travel. 
■ 294. Burial Expenses.—The Government provides the 
burial expenses for a soldier who dies while in active service. 
238 CHAPTER 17 
LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT 
■ 295. Every soldier should have his will drawn up, wit- 
nessed, and signed. A form appears below which is legal any- 
where in the United States. You can change it at any time 
you care to, but fill it in and sign it in the presence of two 
witnesses now. 
FORM OF WILL 
All of my estate I devise and bequeath to 
(Name of beneficiary) 
his 
for own use and benefit forever, and I hereby appoint 
him tor 
=-—my execurr- without bond, with full power to sell, mort- 
her tnx 
gage, lease, or in any other way dispose of the whole or any 
part of my estate. 
Dated 194 
(Signed by soldier in presence of witnesses) 
Subscribed, sealed, published, and declared by 
, testator above named, as and for his last 
(Name of soldier) 
will and testament in the presence of each of us, who at his 
request and in his presence, in the presence of each other, at 
the same time, have hereunto subscribed our names as wit- 
nesses this day of , 194__, at 
(Name of place) 
Signature and addresses 
of two witnesses 
239 Appendix 
GLOSSARY OF COMMON MILITARY EXPRESSIONS 
AWOL.—Absent without authority. 
Aide, or Aide-de-camp.—A personal assistant to a general 
officer. 
Base.—The element on which a movement is regulated. 
Blind.—A money fine of a court-martial sentence. 
Bob-tail.—A dishonorable discharge. 
Bucking for orderly.—Extra efforts for personal appearance 
when competing for post of orderly to the commanding 
officer. 
Bust.—To reduce a noncommissioned officer to the grade of 
private. 
Chow.—Food. 
Cits.—Civilian clothing. 
CO or KO.—Commanding officer. 
Distance.—Space between elements in the direction front to 
rear. 
Dogtags.—ldentification disks. 
Doughboy {dough).—An infantryman. 
Dud.—An unexploded shell. 
-Field, in the.—Campaigning against an enemy under actual 
or assumed conditions. 
File.—A column of men one behind the other. 
Foxhole.—Pit dug by a soldier to protect his body. 
Gl.—Government issue; galvanized iron. 
Guard house lawyer.—A person who knows little but talks 
much about regulations, military law, and soldiers’ 
’“rights.” 
Hash mark.—A service stripe. 
Hike.—To march. 
■Hitch.—-An enlistment period. 
IC.—lnspected and condemned. 
Interval.—Space between elements in the direction parallel to 
the front. 
240 soldier’s handbook 
295 
Jawbone.—Credit. To buy without money. To shoot a weapon 
over a qualification course when it doesn’t count for 
record. 
Kick.—A dishonorable discharge. 
KP.—Kitchen police. 
Lance jack.—A temporary or acting corporal with the same 
duties and authority of a regularly appointed corporal, 
but without the pay of the grade. 
Mess gear.—A soldier’s individual mess kit, knife, fork, spoon, 
and cup, 
MP.—Military police. 
Mule skinner.—A teamster. 
Ncmcom.—A noncommissioned officer. 
OD.—Olive drab or officer of the day. 
On the carpet.—Called before the commanding officer for 
disciplinary reasons. 
Over the hill.—-To desert. 
Pace.—A step 30 inches long. 
Piece.—The rifle or weapon. 
Pup tent.—Shelter tent. 
Reup or takeon.—To reenlist. 
Shave tail.—A second lieutenant. 
Skipper.—The company commander. 
Sniper.—An expert rifle shot detailed to pick off enemy 
leaders or individuals who expose themselves. 
The old mam.—The company commander; commanding officer. 
Top sergeant or top kick.—The first sergeant. 
241 INDEX 
Air Corps: Paragraphs Pages 
Pay 285 237 
Units, organization 52 25 
Allowances: 
Clothing 54, 55 26 
Furlough 287 237 
Allotment of pay 289, 291 238 
American Red Cross 14 4 
Antiaircraft security and protection 226 179 
Antitank security and, protection 227 180 
Armored units, organization 53 25 
Arms: 
Care: 
Responsibility for 60, 62 30 
Importance 61 30 
Pistol, automatic, caliber .45 Ml9ll, nomen- 
clature, care and cleaning, and safety 
devices 64 41 
Rifle, U. S. caliber .30 Ml, nomenclature, care 
and cleaning 63 31 
Safetyl precautions 65 44 
Stacking: 
Platoons 181 133 
Squads 165 125 
Taking 166 126 
Arms and services, insignia 34-40 16 
Officers and noncommissioned officers 41-44 20 
Articles of War 9, 17-19 3,6 
Artificial respiration 271 223 
Athlete’s foot, first aid for 268 222 
Attack, security in 236 204 
Attention positions 86 81 
From parade rest 119 101 
Azimuth determination 205 154 
Automatic rifle, carrying 134 111 
Badges 40 18 
Barber service 20 6 
Barracks, sanitation of 248 208 
Battery, organization 50 24 
Bivouacs: 
For mounted organizations 202 152 
Personal care and comfort in 201 147 
Bleeding, first aid for 257 213 
Body sanitation 240 207 
Brassards 37 18 
Bulletin boards 25 8 
Burial expenses 294 238 
Burns, first aid for 263 219 
243 INDEX 
Campaign security: Paragraphs Pages 
Individual 221, 222 168 
Connecting file 225 117 
Gas protection 228 181 
Lookouts: 
Antiaircraft 226 179 
Antitank 227 180 
Messengers 224 177 
Sentinels 223 176 
Units 229-236 183 
At halt 233 196 
Detachments 230 183 
On march 234 199 
Patrols 232 186 
Scouts 231 183 
While attacking 236 204 
While defending 235 203 
Camps: 
For mounted organizations 202 152 
Personal care and comfort in 201 147 
Sites for 200 147 
Canister, gas mask 69 49 
Chevrons, war and service 39 18 
Civilians, relation of soldier with 12-14 4 
Close interval formation: 
Platoons 176, 177 132 
Squads 158 123 
Clothing: 
Allowances 54, 55 26 
Care 56—58 26 
Sanitation 241-242 207 
Cockroaches, protection against 247 208 
Column of twos, formation: 
Platoons 184 135 
Squads 167 128 
From single file 168 128 
Commanders, responsibility 6 2 
Company, organization 50 24 
Compass, use 203-207 154 
Azimuth determination 205 154 
Description 204 154 
Night 206 155 
Conduct of soldier in public 12, 13 4 
Connecting file 225 177 
Counting off, squads 156 123 
Courtesy, military 30-33 10 
Customs, military, observance 33 15 
Decorations, additional pay for 286 237 
Deductions, pay 292 238 
Defense, security in 235 203 
Deposits, pay 288, 291 237 
Discipline: 
Military 26-29 9 
Definition 26 9 
Importance 27 9 
Purpose 28, 29 10 
Road, on the march 198 143 
244 INDEX 
Paragraphs Pages 
Disease, venereal, prevention 250 208 
Disobedience of orders 9 3 
Double time march 93 85 
Drowning, first aid for 271 223 
Duty of the soldier 7,8 2,3 
Electric shock, first aid for 273 226 
Equipment: 
Care: 
Importance 61 30 
Responsibility for 60, 62 30 
Display of 85 79 
Field: 
Care and cleaning 73-79 50 
Bits 78 51 
Canteens 76 51 
Chains, curb 78 51 
Cloth 74, 75 50 
Knife 77 51 
Leather 79 51 
Mess 76 51 
Metal parts 78 51 
Carrying or wearing 80 53 
Gas masks 66, 72 45,49 
Individual, packing on horse 83, 84 73 
Exhaustion, heat, first aid for 265 221 
Expressions, military, glossary of App. 240 
“Eyes right” or “eyes left” 88 82 
Facing: 
In marching 99 87 
Positions 89 83 
Falling in for march 196 141 
Feet, care_ 252 210 
Field equipment 73-80 50 
Firing, rifle 131 110 
By volley 132 110 
To cease 133 111 
First aid 253-274 210 
Artificial respiration 271 223 
Athlete’s foot 268 222 
Bleeding 257 213 
Burns 263 219 
Drowning 272 223 
Exhaustion, heat 265 221 
Fainting 262 219 
Fractures 259 216 
Treatment 260 216 
Freezing 266 221 
Gas 269 222 
Peacetime 270 223 
Hemorrhage 256 212 
Litters 274 226 
Packet 254 211 
Use 255 211 
Pain, abdominal 267 221 
245 INDEX 
First aid—Continued. Paragraphs Pages 
Shock, electric 273 226 
Sunstroke 264 220 
Wounds, poisoned 261 218 
Fixing bayonets from order arms position 126 103 
Flank march, squads 160 124 
Flies, precautions against 247 208 
Formations: 
Platoons 169-184 129 
Squads 152-169 118 
Furlough allowance 287 237 
Gas: 
First aid for 269 222 
Peacetime 270 223 
Protection against 228 181 
Gas mask 66 45 
Adjustment 68 46 
Care 70 49 
Canister 69 49 
Function 67 45 
Training with 71, 72 49 
Glossary of military expressions App. 240 
Government insurance 290, 291 238 
Grid system, map reading 214 159 
Group— 
Commander, responsibilities 6 2 
Leaders 4 2 
Life, responsibilities In 1-3 1 
Guard duty 185-193 137 
Importance 193 139 
Orders 191 138 
General 192 138 
Personnel 186, 187 137 
Tour of 187 137 
Halting 94 85 
Hat cord 36 16 
Haversack, assembly 82 59 
Heat exhaustion, first aid for 265 221 
Hemorrhage, first aid for 256 212 
Illness, report of 238 206 
Infantry pack 81-82 59 
Haversack and pack carrier assembly 82 59 
Injured, transportation of 274,275 226, 227 
Insignia, arms and services 34,35 16 
Arm bands 37 18 
Badges 40 18 
Chevrons, wound and war service 39 18 
Hat cord 36 16 
Officers 41 20 
General 42 20 
General Staff Corps 43 20 
Noncommissioned 41, 44 20 
Service stripe 38 18 
246 INDEX 
Inspection arms position: Paragraphs Pages 
Prom order arms 112 96 
To order arms, port arms, or right shoulder 
arms 113 99 
Inspection, pistol 143, 151 115,117 
Insurance, government 290, 291 238 
Interior guard duty 185-193 137 
Last will and testament 295 239 
Leaders, group 4 2 
Left shoulder arms position: 
Prom right shoulder arms 120 101 
To order arms 123 102 
To port arms 121 101 
To right shoulder arms 122 101 
Litters 274 226 
Loading— 
Pistol 141,149 114,117 
Rifle 129 105 
Magazine, pistol: 
Inserting 140,148 114,117 
Withdrawing 139,146 114,116 
Manual of— 
Arms for rifle 104-127 92 
Rules governing 104 92 
Pistol 135 113 
Dismounted 136-144 113 
Mounted 145-151 116 
Maps: 
Direction 211 158 
Importance 208 156 
Orientation 212, 213 159 
Reading 214-216 159 
Grid system 214 159 
Scale, application 210 157 
Symbols, military 216 163 
Use 208-216 156 
Marches 194-198 140 
Conduct on 197 141 
Falling in for 196 141 
Preparation for 195 140 
Road discipline on 198 143 
Security on 234 199 
Marchings 91 84 
By the flank 100,162 88,124 
Double time 93 85 
Pacing 99 87 
Halting 94 85 
Marking time 95 86 
Other than at attention 102 89 
Platoons 174 132 
Changing direction 178 133 
Close interval 176 132 
Normal interval 177 132 
Toward flank 180 133 
Quick time 92 85 
247 INDEX 
Marchings—Continued, Paragraphs Pages 
Squads: 
By the flank 162 124 
Changing direction 163 125 
Oblique ; 161 124 
Toward flank 160 124 
Steps: 
Back 98 87 
Changing 101 89 
Half 96 86 
Side 97 87 
Messengers, duty on campaign 224 177 
Military— 
Courtesy 30—33 10 
Addressing officers and nurses 31 14 
Saluting 30,33 10,15 
Customs, observance 33 15 
Discipline 26-29 9 
Expressions, glossary of App. 240 
Obligations of soldier 15,16 5 
Police, brassards 37 18 
Sanitation: 
Barracks and squad room 248 208 
Body 240 207 
Clothing 241,242 207 
Feet 252 210 
Finger nails 249 208 
Hair 249 208 
Illness, reporting 238 200 
Importance 237 206 
In the field 251 209 
Mouth 243,245 207,208 
Precautions against— 
Cockroaches 247 208 
Flies 247 208 
Mosquitoes 246 208 
Venereal disease 250 208 
Toilet 244 207 
Nomenclature: 
Pistol, automatic, caliber .45, Ml9ll 64 41 
Rifle, U. S. caliber .30, Ml 63 31 
Noncommissioned officers: 
Addressing 32 14 
Duty relative punishment and arrest 9, 10 3 
Insignia 41, 44 20 
Nurses, addressing 32 14 
Obligations of the soldier 15, 16 5 
Oblique march, squads 161 124 
Officers: 
Addressing 32 14 
Appointment 5 
Insignia 41-44 20 
Soldier’s relation to 4-12 2 
248 INDEX 
Paragraphs Pages 
Order arms position 105 93 
From— 
Inspection arms 113 99 
Left shoulder arms 123 102 
Port arms, or present arms 111 96 
Right shoulder arms 116 100 
Trail arms 107 95 
To— 
Fix bayonets 126 103 
Inspection arms 112 96 
Parade rest 118 101 
Port arms 109 95 
Present arms 110 95 
Rifle salute 124 102 
Right shoulder arms 114 99 
Sling arms 108 95 
Trail arms 106 95 
Unfix bayonets 127 104 
Orders: 
Guard duty - 191 138 
General 192 138 
Obedience to 7,8 2,3 
Failure of, punishment 9 3 
Orientation, map 1 212, 213 159 
Organization, Army 45-53 22 
Definition 45 22 
Purpose 46,47 22 
Units of : 47 22 
Air Corps 52 22 
Armored 53 25 
Battery 50 24 
Company 50 24 
Platoon 49 23 
Regiment 51 24 
Squad 48 23 
Troop 50 24 
Pack carrier assembly 82 59 
Pack infantry 81-82 59 
Pain, abdominal, first aid for 267 221 
Parade rest position: 
From order arms 118 101 
To attention 119 101 
Patrols, security, and reconnaissance 232 186 
Pay: 
Air Corps 285 237 
Allotments 289t, 291 238 
Decoration 286 237 
Deductions 292 238 
Deposits 288,291 237,238 
Rate of 283 236 
Specialists 284 236 
Travel 293 238 
273916°—41—9 
249 INDEX 
pistol. Paragraphs Pages 
Automatic, caliber .45, Ml9ll 64 41 
Manual of 135 113 
Dismounted 136-144 113 
Chamber: 
Closing 139 114 
Opening 138 114 
Inspecting 143 115 
Loading 141 114 
Magazine: 
Inserting 140 114 
Withdrawing 137 114 
Raising 136 113 
Returning 144 115 
Unloading 142 114 
Mounted 145-151 116 
Inspecting 151 117 
Loading 149 117 
Magazine: 
Inserting 148 117 
Withdrawing 146 116 
Opening chamber 147 117 
Unloading 150 117 
Platoon: 
Composition 170 129 
Dismissing 173 130 
Formation 169,170,172 129,130 
Close— 
Interval 176 132 
Ranks 182 133 
Columns of twos 184 135 
For shelter tents 183 134 
Line to the front 179 133 
Normal interval 177 132 
Open ranks 182 133 
Single file 184 135 
Individuals, position of 171 129 
Marching 174 132 
Changing direction 178 133 
Close interval , 176 132 
Guide in 175 132 
Normal interval 177 132 
Toward flanks 180 133 
Organization 49 23 
Reforming 184 135 
Stacking arms 181 133 
Port arms position: 
From— 
Inspection arms 113 99 
Left shoulder arms 121 101 
Order arms 109 95 
Right shoulder arms 115 100 
To— 
Order arms 111 96 
Right shoulder arms 117 100 
250 INDEX 
Positions: Paragraphs Pages 
Attention 86 81 
“Eyes right”, or “eyes left” 88 82 
Facing into 89 83 
Rest 87 81 
Salute, hand 90 83 
Post and station activities 20-25 6 
Barber service 20 6 
Bulletin board announcements of 25 8 
Exchanges 21 7 
Photograph shop 23 7 
Recreational 24 8 
Tailor service 20 6 
Theaters, motion picture 22 7 
Present arms position: 
From order arms 110 95 
To order arms 111 96 
Protection and security: 
Antiaircraft 226 179 
Antitank ; 227 180 
Punishment, authority to administer 9 3 
Quick time march 92 85 
Rations 276-282 232 
Cooking, fire for 282 234 
Kinds of , 277 232 
On campaign u 280 234 
Preparation in the field 279 234 
Reconnaissance patrols 232 186 
Red Cross brassards 37 18 
Regiment, organization 51 24 
Rest positions 87 81 
Rifle: 
Carrying 103,134 90,111 
Firing 131 110 
By volley 132 110 
To cease 133 111 
Loading 129 105 
Manual of arms for 104r-127 92 
Salute position: 
From— 
Order arms 124 102 
Right shoulder arms 125 102 
Trail arms 124 102 
Unloading 130 107 
U. S. caliber .30, Ml 63 31 
Right shoulder arms position: 
From— 
Inspection arms 113 99 
Left shoulder arms 122 101 
Order arms 114 99 
Port arms 117 100 
To— 
Left shoulder arms 120 101 
Order arms 116 100 
251 INDEX 
Right shoulder arms position—Continued. 
To—Continued Paragraphs Pages 
Port arms 115 100 
Rifle salute 125 102 
Road discipline on marches 198 143 
Saddle, packing 83, 84 73 
Safety— 
Devices, automatic pistol, caliber .45, Ml9ll 64 41 
Precautions, use of arms 65 44 
Salutes, military 30 10 
Hand 89 83 
Rifle 124,125, 130 102,107 
Sanitation, military 237-252 206 
Squad room 248 208 
Security: 
Antiaircraft 226 179 
Antitank 227 180 
In the Army 217-220 167 
On campaign: 
Individual 221, 222 168 
Lookouts: 
Antiaircraft 226 179 
Antitank 227 180 
Sentinels 223 176 
Unit 229-236 183 
At halt 233 196 
Detachments 230 183 
On march 234 199 
Patrols 232 186 
Scouts 231 183 
While attacking 236 204 
While defending 235 203 
Service stripes 38 18 
Shelter tent pitching 201 147 
Forming platoon for 183 134 
Shelters, kinds of 199 147 
Shock, electric, first aid for 273 226 
Sling arms position: 
From order arms 108 95 
To unsling arms 108 95 
Specialists, pay 284 236 
Squads 152 118 
Dismissing 155 123 
Formation 153 118 
Alinement 157 123 
Assembling 164 125 
Close interval 158 123 
Columns of twos 167 128 
From, and to, single file 168 128 
Instructions for 154 121 
Taking interval 164 125 
Marching: 
By the flank 162 124 
Changing direction 163 125 
Oblique 161 124 
Toward flank 159 123 
252 INDEX 
Squads—Continued. Paragraphs Pages 
Organization 48 23 
Stacking arms 165 125 
Taking arms 166 127 
Steps, marching 91 84 
Back ; 98 87 
Changing 101 89 
Double time 93 85 
Half 96 86 
Mark time 95 86 
Quick time 92 85 
Side 97 87 
Sunstroke, first aid for 264 220 
Tailor service 20 6 
Tents, shelter, pitching 201 147 
Platoon formation for 183 134 
Testament and last will 295 239 
Theaters, motion picture 22 7 
Toilet sanitation 244 207 
Tourniquet, use 258 213 
Trail arms positions: 
From order arms 106 95 
To order arms 107 95 
To rifle salute 124 102 
Transportation of injured 274, 275 226, 227 
Travel pay 293 238 
Troop organization 50 24 
Unfixing bayonets, from order arms position 127 104 
Uniform, wearing 59 28 
Units of Army organization 47 22 
Air Corps 52 25 
Armored 53 25 
Battery 50 24 
Company 50 24 
Platoon 49 23 
Regiment 51 24 
Squad 48 23 
Troop 50 24 
Unloading— 
Pistol 142, 150 114, 117 
Rifle 130 107 
Unslinging rifle from sling arms position 108 95 
Venereal disease, prevention 250 208 
Veterinary green cross brassards 37 18 
Will, last, and testament 295 239 
Wounds, poisoned, first aid for 261 218 
253